Acts 12:10 — Word Study
N1904διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
BSAHaving passed throughdierchomai▸ [traversed, went through] thende a firstprōtos guardphulakē [watchmen, prison keepers] andkai a seconddeuteros they cameerchomai▸ toepi theho gatepulē [entrance, doorway] <the>ho ironsidēreos [made of iron, strong] whichho is leadingpherō▸ [directing, guiding] intoeis theho city,polis [town, metropolis] whichhostis, hētis by itselfautomatos [automatically, of its own accord] openedanoigō▸ [was opened, swung open] to them,autos Andkai having gone outexerchomai▸ [come out, emerged] they went on throughproerchomai▸ [proceeded, went] streetrhumē [street, lane] oneehis andkai immediatelyeutheōs [immediately, at once] departedaphistēmi▸ [departed, withdrew] theho angelangelos [messenger, heavenly being] fromapo him.autos
| Greek | English | Parsing |
|---|---|---|
| διελθόντες | Having passed through | Verb, second aorist, active |
| δὲ | then | Conjunction |
| πρώτην | a first | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| φυλακὴν | guard | Noun, accusative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| δευτέραν | a second | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| ἦλθαν | they came | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ἐπὶ | to | Preposition |
| τὴν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| πύλην | gate | Noun, accusative, singular |
| τὴν | <the> | Article, accusative, singular |
| σιδηρᾶν | iron | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| τὴν | which | Article, accusative, singular |
| φέρουσαν | is leading | Verb, present, active |
| εἰς | into | Preposition |
| τὴν | the | Article, accusative, singular |
| πόλιν, | city, | Noun, accusative, singular |
| ἥτις | which | Relative pronoun, nominative, singular |
| αὐτομάτη | by itself | Adjective, nominative, singular |
| ἠνοίγη | opened | Verb, aorist, passive |
| αὐτοῖς, | to them, | Personal pronoun, dative, plural |
| καὶ | And | Conjunction |
| ἐξελθόντες | having gone out | Verb, second aorist, active |
| προῆλθον | they went on through | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ῥύμην | street | Noun, accusative, singular |
| μίαν | one | Adjective, accusative, singular |
| καὶ | and | Conjunction |
| εὐθέως | immediately | Adverb |
| ἀπέστη | departed | Verb, second aorist, active |
| ὁ | the | Article, nominative, singular |
| ἄγγελος | angel | Noun, nominative, singular |
| ἀπ᾽ | from | Preposition |
| αὐτοῦ. | him. | Personal pronoun, genitive, singular |
Every word in the verse. Click a row to open it in the panel on the left.
| BSB | They passed the first and second guards and came to the iron gate leading to the city, which opened for them by itself. When they had gone outside and walked the length of one block, the angel suddenly left him. |
| KJV | When they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of his own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and forthwith the angel departed from him. |
| ASV | And when they were past the first and the second guard, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth into the city; which opened to them of its own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and straightway the angel departed from him. |
| YLT | and having passed through a first ward, and a second, they came unto the iron gate that is leading to the city, which of its own accord did open to them, and having gone forth, they went on through one street, and immediately the messenger departed from him. |
| WEB | When they were past the first and the second guard, they came to the iron gate that leads into the city, which opened to them by itself. They went out and went down one street, and immediately the angel departed from him. |
| BBE | And when they had gone past the first and second watchmen they came to the iron door into the town, which came open by itself: and they went out and down one street; and then the angel went away. |
Where they part company is διελθόντες — see How Translations Differ.
The sentence consists of a main clause with several participial and prepositional phrases providing detail about the actions taken.
8 commentators on this verse
Gill, Jamieson, Poole, Trapp & more — read them ›
clause
subjectδιέρχομαι
verbδιέρχομαι
The sentence as the grammar sees it Open the tree ›
Every word here is used elsewhere in the New Testament.
Bars are logarithmic — ὁ, the commonest word in the Greek New Testament, stands 19,867 times, so a linear scale would leave everything else invisible. Click a row to open that word.
Deep Study — Acts 12:10
Sections marked generated are written from the data on this page rather than by a named author. Everything else — the lexicon entries, the cross references, the manuscript readings, the counts — is quoted from its source unchanged.
Context — Peter's Miraculous Escapegenerated
Acts 12:10 describes Peter's escape from prison, where he passes by the guards and arrives at an iron gate that opens by itself. This miraculous event highlights God's intervention and the angel's guidance. The narrative emphasizes the supernatural nature of Peter's release, contrasting with the human efforts of the guards who were unaware of the escape.
Cross References
| Reference | Text (BSB) | |
|---|---|---|
| 1 | Acts 12:4 | He arrested him and put him in prison, handing him over to be guarded by four squads of four soldiers each. Herod intended to bring him out to the people after the Passover. |
| 2 | Genesis 40:3 | and imprisoned them in the house of the captain of the guard, the same prison where Joseph was confined. |
| 3 | Genesis 42:17 | So Joseph imprisoned them for three days, |
| 4 | Numbers 15:34 | and because it had not been declared what should be done to him, they placed him in custody. |
| 5 | Isaiah 21:8 | Then the lookout shouted: “Day after day, my lord, I stand on the watchtower; night after night I stay at my post. |
The Treasury of Scripture Knowledge — 10 references, hung on the phrase they belong to
The Key Word — διελθόντες, dierchomaigenerated
The word διέρχομαι (dierchomai) means to pass through or traverse. It is used here to describe Peter's movement through the guards, indicating both a physical journey and a miraculous escape.
As a second aorist active participle, it suggests a completed action in the past, emphasizing that Peter has already passed through the guards at the time of the narrative.
How Translations Differ — measured against the Berean Standard Biblegenerated
The translations agree on the action of passing through the guards, with slight variations in wording. For example, the BSB uses passed, while the KJV uses were past.
Where they differ is in the rendering of φέρουσαν. The BSB uses leading, while the LSV and YLT use is leading.
Sentence Structuregenerated
The main verb in the verse is ἦλθαν, they came, which governs the entire sentence. It is accompanied by a series of participial phrases and prepositional phrases that describe the actions taken by Peter and the angel.
The structure includes several clauses: a main clause indicating the action of coming, followed by participial phrases that provide details on how they passed through the guards and the gate.
Septuagint Backgroundgenerated
φυλακή appears in the Septuagint, translating the Hebrew word for guard or watch. This connection emphasizes the role of guards in both the Old and New Testaments, highlighting themes of protection and vigilance.
πύλη also appears in the Septuagint, referring to gates or entrances, similar to its use here in Acts, reinforcing the concept of access and barriers.
In plain words — the whole versegenerated
Acts 12:10 tells us that Peter was led out of prison by an angel. They passed by the guards and came to an iron gate that opened by itself. Once outside, they walked down a street, and then the angel left Peter.
Frequently Asked Questionsgenerated
This indicates a miraculous event where the gate opened without any human intervention, showcasing divine assistance.
It emphasizes the miraculous nature of Peter's escape, as he moved past the guards undetected.
The angel's role illustrates God's active involvement in delivering and guiding His people.
Peter's escape symbolizes spiritual freedom and God's power over earthly authorities.
Reflection Questionsgenerated
- In what areas of my life do I need to trust God's guidance like Peter did?
- How can I recognize divine intervention in my daily experiences?
- What does this passage teach me about the nature of God's protection?
- How can I share the message of hope found in this miraculous escape with others?
The early church on this verse — how the Fathers read it
John Chrysostom comments on this miraculous event in his homilies, highlighting the significance of Peter's escape and the divine intervention involved.
When they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of its own accord. Behold, a second miracle.Early Church Fathers on Acts 12 →
And when they had passed the first and the second ward, they came to the iron gate, which opened unto them of its own accord: and yet the things that had happened within the prison were more marvellous: but this was now more after the…Early Church Fathers on Acts 12 →
When they were past the first and the second ward - see also how strong the guard was - they came unto the iron gate.Early Church Fathers on Acts 12 →
Commentators on this verse — 8 expositors, verse by verse
Each of these wrote on Acts 12:10 itself, not merely on the chapter around it.
John Gill1697–1771Gill's Exposition of the Entire BibleWhen they were past the first and the second ward,.... Or watch, which were set within the prison, and might be some of the quaternions of soldiers to whom Peter was delivered; two of them were with
Read John Gill on Acts 12 →Robert Jamieson1802–1880Jamieson, Fausset, and Brown's CommentaryWhen they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of his own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one
Read Robert Jamieson on Acts 12 →Matthew Poole1624–1679Matthew Poole's Commentary on the Holy BibleThe first and the second ward; guard or sentinels. The iron gate that leadeth unto the city; the outermost gate that led out of the prison into the city, not that the prison itself was out of the city. Which opened to them of his own accord: God worketh a series of miracles in their fit place and time; he could have done them all together, and have opened his iron gate beforehand, when he conducted Peter through the first, then through the second watch; but it is good for Peter, and us, to be convinced that we stand every moment in need of God’ s conduct and deliverance.
Read Matthew Poole on Acts 12 →John Trapp1601–1669Trapp's Complete Commentary on the Old and New Testaments10 When they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of his own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and forthwith the angel departed from him. Ver. 10. When they were passed] God could have delivered him all at once; but he knew that cito data cito vilescunt, Lightly come by is lightly set by. He would have us also to weigh well the several passages and circumstances of our deliverance, that he may have the honour of all. Hence those catalogues in Scripture, with an enumeration of particulars.
Read John Trapp on Acts 12 →Charles John Ellicott1819–1905Ellicott's Commentary for English Readers(10) When they were past the first and the second ward.—It would seem from this that Peter had been placed in the innermost dungeon, and had to pass the two court-yards. Lightfoot supposes the prison to have been between the inner and outer walls of the city, the direction of Peter’s movements being from the outer to the inner. The iron gate.—The touch of topographical precision may be noticed as characteristic of St. Luke. Passed on through one street.—The word implies one of the narrow streets or lanes of the city. (See Note on Matthew 6:2.)
Read Charles John Ellicott on Acts 12 →AdamClarkeAdam Clarke's Commentary on the BibleVerse 10. The first and - second ward] It is supposed that ancient Jerusalem was surrounded by three walls: if so, then passing through the gates of these three walls successively is possibly what is meant by the expression in the text. The prison in which he was confined might have been that which was at the outer wall. Iron gate] This was in the innermost wall of the three, and was strongly plated over with iron, for the greater security. In the east, the gates are often thus secured to the present day. Pitts says so of the gates of Algiers; and Pocock, of some near Antioch. Perhaps this is all that is meant by the iron gate. One of the quaternions of soldiers was placed at each gate.…
Read AdamClarke on Acts 12 →CambridgeThe Cambridge Bible for Schools and Colleges10. When they were past the first and the second ward] i.e. the warders, who were stationed one nearer to the inner door of the prison and another at some further distance away.they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto [into] the city] This description, with the words which immediately follow about the street into which they came, make it probable that the prison in which Peter was kept was in the midst of the city.which opened to them of his own accord] It is better to discard in sentences like the present the old English form “his” and read “its.” “His” was good and almost the only English use when the A. V. was made, but is now obsolete.For the expression “of its own accord” cp.…
Read Cambridge on Acts 12 →Albert Barnes1798–1870Barnes' Notes on the BibleThe first and second ward - The word which is here rendered “ward” φυλακήν phulakēn properly denotes “the act of guarding”; but it is most commonly used to denote “a prison, or place of
Read Albert Barnes on Acts 12 →The verse in English, compared — 16 translations, and where they part company
Every translation on this page is a decision someone had to make and commit to. Read down a column and you see one translator's judgement; read across a row and you see the range the Greek actually allows. The BSB is the wording the rest of this page is measured against, so it is listed first.
Modern formal
They passed the first and second guards and came to the iron gate leading to the city, which opened for them by itself. When they had gone outside and walked the length of one block, the angel suddenly left him.
When they were past the first and the second guard, they came to the iron gate that leads into the city, which opened to them by itself. They went out and went down one street, and immediately the angel departed from him.
They passed the first and second guards and came to the iron gate leading to the city, which opened for them by itself. When they had gone outside and walked the length of one block, the angel suddenly left him.
After they had passed the first and second guards, they came to the iron gate leading into the city. It opened for them by itself, and they went outside and walked down one narrow street, when at once the angel left him.
Tyndale line
When they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth unto the city; which opened to them of his own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and forthwith the angel departed from him.
And when they were past the first and the second guard, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth into the city; which opened to them of its own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and straightway the angel departed from him.
And when they were past the first and the second ward, they came unto the iron gate that leadeth into the city; which opened to them of its own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and straightway the angel departed from him.
When they were past the first and the second ward, they came to the iron gate that leadeth to the city; which opened to them of its own accord: and they went out, and passed on through one street; and forthwith the angel departed from him.
Nowe when they were past the first and the second watch, they came vnto the yron gate, that leadeth vnto the citie, which opened to them by it owne accord, and they went out, and passed through one streete, and by and by the Angel departed from him.
Strictly literal
And having passed through a first and second guard, they came to the iron gate which leads into the city, which opened to them of itself; and going forth they went down one street, and immediately the angel left him.
and having passed through a first ward, and a second, they came unto the iron gate that is leading to the city, which of its own accord did open to them, and having gone forth, they went on through one street, and immediately the messenger departed from him.
and having passed through a first ward, and a second, they came to the iron gate that is leading into the city, which opened to them of its own accord, and having gone forth, they went on through one street, and immediately the messenger departed from him.
After they had passed by the first guard and the second, they came to the iron gate that led into the city; it opened for them by itself. They went out and went down a street, and the angel left him right away.
From the Latin
And passing through the first and the second ward, they came to the iron gate that leadeth to the city, which of itself opened to them. And going out, they passed on through one street: and immediately the angel departed from him.
Simplified
They passed the first and second sets of guards, and came to the iron gate that led into the city. This opened for them by itself. They went out and down the street, when suddenly the angel left him.
And when they had gone past the first and second watchmen they came to the iron door into the town, which came open by itself: and they went out and down one street; and then the angel went away.
Word by word, the decisions they made
Counted from the translations carried on this site, not from a survey of every English Bible. A rendering shared by many versions is usually inherited rather than independently arrived at — the Tyndale line in particular runs through most of them.
The sentence as the grammar sees it — from the Nestle 1904 treebank
This is not our own analysis: it is the scholarly syntax tree for the verse, showing how the clause actually holds together.
Boxes are the grammarian's groupings — clause, noun phrase, prepositional phrase.
The earliest translations — Latin and Syriac
Every translation is an argument about meaning made by someone who had to commit to one. These two were made while the Greek was still a living language, and they are the oldest opinions we have about what this verse says.
Transeuntes autem primam et secundam custodiam, venerunt ad portam ferream, quæ ducit ad civitatem : quæ ultro aperta est eis. Et exeuntes processerunt vicum unum : et continuo discessit angelus ab eo.
Jerome revised the Old Latin against the Greek from AD 382; the Latin west read this text for a thousand years.
ܘܟܕ ܥܒܪܘ ܡܛܪܬܐ ܩܕܡܝܬܐ ܘܕܬܪܬܝܢ ܐܬܘ ܥܕܡܐ ܠܬܪܥܐ ܕܦܪܙܠܐ ܘܐܬܦܬܚ ܠܗܘܢ ܡܢ ܨܒܘܬ ܢܦܫܗ ܘܟܕ ܢܦܩܘ ܘܥܒܪܘ ܫܘܩܐ ܚܕ ܦܪܩ ܡܢ ܠܘܬܗ ܡܠܐܟܐ
The Bible of the Syriac-speaking church, in the language nearest to the Aramaic Jesus spoke.
Shown verse by verse rather than word by word: aligning a Greek word to its Latin or Syriac counterpart automatically would be guesswork, and a wrong alignment is worse than none.
The Greek editions compared — what the manuscripts actually say
Eight printed editions of the Greek New Testament, side by side. Where they agree the wording is settled; where a word is missing from an edition it is marked, so you can see the difference rather than take it on trust.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The standard critical text of the New Testament.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The previous edition, still widely cited.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The Society of Biblical Literature edition, freely licensed.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The edition that turned scholarship toward the earliest manuscripts.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
An independent critical text built from the oldest witnesses then known.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
A recent critical edition following documentary evidence closely.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη ἠνοίγη αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The reading of the majority of surviving manuscripts.
διελθόντες δὲ πρώτην φυλακὴν καὶ δευτέραν ἦλθαν ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τὴν σιδηρᾶν τὴν φέρουσαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἥτις αὐτομάτη — αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἐξελθόντες προῆλθον ῥύμην μίαν καὶ εὐθέως ἀπέστη ὁ ἄγγελος ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ.
The printed tradition behind the King James Version.
A witness that read differently would show its variant word here, marked.
Word by word, across the editions
| Word | Editions carrying it | Missing from |
|---|---|---|
| ἠνοίγη opened | NA28, NA27, Tyn, SBL, WH, Treg, Byz | TR |
The map of this verse — what each word keeps company with
This is a map of two things, both counted rather than judged. Company kept: which words stand within three words of each of these, anywhere in the Greek New Testament — the thicker the line, the more often the pair meet compared with chance. Built from: the words a word is made out of, taken from its own Strong’s entry. It is not a map of meaning: nothing here claims two words mean the same thing. Click any circle to see the numbers behind it.
Lexicons — every word in Acts 12:10
One dossier per word, with every reference work grouped by kind — Greek lexicons, morphology, Bible dictionaries, topical chains and the English of the translators themselves. The verse sits at the head of each block with the word under study lit, so you never lose your place. The panel above gives the short answer; this is the long one, and it is the part of the page worth indexing.
Every entry below is the lexicographer's own text. Imported from the CrossWire SWORD modules — Abbott-Smith, the full Liddell-Scott-Jones, Strong's, Dodson, the Intermediate LSJ, Robinson and Packard on the Greek, Webster and Cawdrey on the English the translators were using. Where a cell says a work has no entry, that work genuinely has none for this word.
διέρχομαι (dierchomai) means to pass through or traverse. It can refer to both physical movement and the spreading of reports. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts like traveling (e.g., Matthew 19:24) and spreading news (e.g., Luke 5:15). The word is built from the prefix διά (through) and a root meaning to come or go.
δι-έρχομαι ; impf. διηρχόμην ; fut. διελεύσομαι (Lk. ii. 35; see W. 86 (82); [οἵ. B. 58 (50)]); 2 aor. διῆλθον; pf. ptep. διεληλυθώς (Heb. iv. 14); [fr. Hom. down]; 1. where διά has the force of through (Lat. per; [cf. διά, C.]): to go through, pass through, [on its construetions cf. W. § 52,4, 8]; a. διά τινος, to go, walk, journey, pass through a place (Germ. den Durchweg nehmen): Mt. xii. 43; xix. 24 RL Tr mrg. WH mrg.; Mk. x. 25 [Rec.
διέρχομαι. OG/S 66535 (A.D. 49) καὶ τούτους δὲ στέγηι μόνον δέxer8at τοὺς διερχομένους. Field (WVo/es, p. 88) points out that the preposition must not be pressed, as in Jn 4° RV; all that it implies is merely that a certain distance is to be traversed, whether long or short, cf. Lk 24%, Ac 97. But this does not involve ignoring the difference between the compound and the AV simplex: the RV exaggeration 1s slight, and very effective. Ramsay Exp V. i. p. 385 ff. argues that δ. in Ac implies missionary travel. The veib is very common in connexion with past time, e.g. Rev L 18° (iii/p.c.) ὅταν δὶὲ ὃ πεπραμένος χρόνος ἅπας διελθῆι, P Oxy 11. 238° (A.D. 72) ἐν τῶι διεληλυθότι τετάρτωι ἔτει, 7). IX. 1108} (A.D. 150) τῶι διελθόντι δωδεκάτῳ ἔτι, 20. III. 47518 (a.v. 182) ὀψ[ῆας τῆς διελθούσίης…
Read the full entry →διέρχομαι (dierchomai) — to pass through.
διέρχομαι,
future διελεύσομαι (but δίειμι is used in Attic dialect as future, and διῄειν as imperfect): aorist διῆλθον:— go through, pass through, absolutely, ἀντικρὺ δὲ διῆλθε βέλος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; διέρχεται ἅπαντα διὰ τούτου [NT+8th c.BC+]; θύρας (plural) [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. pass through, complete, τὸ πέμπτον μέρος τῆς ὁδοῦ [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. of reports, βάξις διῆλθ᾽ Ἀχαιούς [Refs 5th c.BC+]went abroad, spread, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
4. of pain, shoot through one, [Refs]; of passion, ἵμερος δ. Ἡρακλῆ [Refs]; ἐμὲ διῆλθέ τι a thought shot through me, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
5. pass through and reach, arrive at, βίου τέλος [Refs 5th c.BC+]
διέρχομαι
dierchomai
from 1223 and 2064; to traverse (literally):--come, depart, go (about,
abroad, everywhere, over, through, throughout), pass (by, over,
through, throughout), pierce through, travel, walk through.
see GREEK for 1223
see GREEK for 2064
διέρχομαι
v.
I pass through, spread a report
διέρχομαι dierchomai 43x
to pass through, Mk. 10:25; Lk. 4:30; to pass over, cross, Mk. 4:35; Lk. 8:22; to pass along, Lk. 19:4; to proceed, Lk. 2:15; Acts 9:38; to travel through or over a country, wander about, Mt. 12:43; Lk. 9:6; to transfix, pierce, Lk. 2:35; to spread abroad, be prevalent, as a rumor, Read the full entry →
διέρχομαι fut. διελεύσομαι but attic fut. δίειμι attic imperf. διῄειν aor2 διῆλθον fut. διελεύσομαι, but δίειμι is attic fut.,διῄειν imperf. Dep. to go through, pass through, absol. or c. gen., Il., Soph.:—c. acc., also, Il., Thuc., etc.
to pass through, complete, Hdt., Plat., etc.
of reports, βάξις διῆλθ᾽ Ἀχαιούς Soph.; absol., λόγος διῆλθε went abroad, spread, Thuc., Xen.
of pain, to shoot through one, Soph.; of passion, id. Soph.; ἐμὲ διῆλθέ τι a thought shot through me, Eur.
to go through in detail, tell all through, Aesch., Thuc.
intr. of Time, to pass, elapse, Hdt., Dem.; so, σπονδῶν διελθουσῶν Thuc.; but, διελθὼν ἐς βραχὺν χρόνον having waited, Eur.
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
44 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 25 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 41 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 61 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„Καὶ εἶπε Κάιν πρὸς Ἄβελ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ Διέλθωμεν ἐπὶ τὸ πεδίον.
τὸ σύνολον δὲ μάλιστά τις ἂν ἐκ ταύτης μάθοι τῆς ἱστορίας ἐθελήσας αὐτὴν διελθεῖν, ὅτι τοῖς μὲν θεοῦ γνώμῃ κατακολουθοῦσι καὶ τὰ καλῶς νομοθετηθέντα μὴ τολμῶσι παραβαίνειν πάντα κατορθοῦται πέρα πίστεως καὶ γέρας εὐδαιμονία πρόκειται παρὰ θεοῦ·
καὶ εἶπεν Κάϊν πρὸς Ἄβελ τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ: Διέλθωμεν εἰς τὸ πεδίον.
μοι πλείσταις πληγαῖς με ᾐκίσαντο καυψιλα … μου ἱμάτιον καὶ εἰ μὴ ὁ κωμογραμματεὺς διερχόμενος ἐβοήθησέ μοι … ομένου μοῦ … μ … υς ἀνὰ μέσον τῆς α
οὐκ ἀντέγραψάς μοι. εἰ ἐκομίσου, ἀντίγραψόν μοι. καὶ ἀπέσταλκάς μοι ἐπιστολὴν ἣν οὐχ εὗρον διελθεῖν, καὶ εἰ ἤκουκας περὶ σουκκεσσόρων ἀκριβέστατα, γράψον μοι. μὴ οὖν ἄλλως ποιήσῃς, ἄδελφέ μου.
r Κλαύδιος Ἀγαθὸς Δαίμων Σαραπίωνι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. διερχόμενος εἰς Θηβαΐδα ἀσπάζομαί σε ἥδιστα, γλυκύτατε Σαραπίων, καὶ παρακαλῶ σε τὸ αὐτὸ ποιεῖν καί,
δέ (de) is a post-positive particle in Greek, primarily used as a conjunction to connect clauses. It can express contrast (but, on the other hand) or continuation (and, also), and is often used to transition between ideas or to add emphasis. In the New Testament, it appears frequently in various contexts, such as contrasting statements or resuming interrupted discourse, with notable examples in Matthew and 2 Corinthians.
δέ (before vowels δ’; on the general neglect of the elision in NT, v. WH, App., 146; Tdf., Pr., 96),
post-positive conjunctive particle;
copulative, but, in the next place, and, now (Abbott, JG, 104): Mt 1:2ff., II Co 6:15, 16, II Pe 1:5-7; in repetition for emphasis, Ro 3:21, 22, 9:30, I Co 2:6, Ga 2:2, Phl 2:8; in transition to something new, Mt 1:18 2:19, Lk 13:1, Jo 7:14, Ac 6:1, Read the full entry →
δέ (related to δή, as μέν to μήν, ef. Klotz ad Devar. ii. 2 p. 355), a particle adversative, distinctive, disjunctive, but, moreover, (W.§ 53, 7 and 10, 2); it is much more freq. in the historical parts of the N. T. than in the other books, very rare in the Epp. of John and the Apocalypse. {On its general neglect of elision (when the next word begins with a vowel) cf. Tdf. Proleg. p. 96; WH. App. Ῥ 146; W.§5,1a.; B. p.10sq.] It is used ἘΠ ΟἹ δὲ univ. by way of opposition and distinction; it is added to statements opp. to a preceding statement: ἐὰν yap ἀφῆτε... ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε, Mt. vi. 14 sq.; ἐὰν de ὁ ὀφθαλμὸς κτλ. Mt. vi. 23; ἐλεύσονται δὲ ἡμέραι, Mk. ii. 20; it opposes persons to persons or things previously mentioned or thought of, —either with strong emphasis: ἐγὼ δέ, Mt. v. 22, 28, 32, 34, 39,44; ἡμεῖς de, 1 Co. i. 23; 2 Co. x. 13; σὺ δέ, Mt. vi. 6; ὑμεῖς δέ, Mk. viii. 29; of δὲ…
Read the full entry →δεῖ. For the conjunctive, as in Mt 26%, cf. P Fay 109° (early i/A.D.) ἐάν σε δῇ (for δέῃ) τὸ εἱμάτιόν σου θεῖναι ἐνέχυρον. “even if you have to pawn your cloak” (Edd.). In P Tebt I. 585° (B.c. 111) we have ἐάν followed by the indicative— ἐὰν δεῖ σε συνπεσεῖν τῶι ᾿Ανικήτωι, σύνπεσαι, ‘if you must meet Anicetus, meet him” (Edd.): cf. Mayser G7. p. 325. Other examples of the verb are l’ Par 461® (B.C. 153) διὸ Kal ἡγούμενος δεῖν ἐπ᾿ ἄλλου μὲν μηθενὸς αὐτῶι διακριθῆναι» P Lille I. 267 (iii.B.c.) περὶ (corr. from πεερὶ) δὲ τούτου τοῦ μέρους δεήσει ἐπισχεῖν, P Tebt 11. 3414 (A.p. 140-1) δεήσι ἐπισταλῆναι εἰς δάνε[ι]α σπέρματα κατασπίο]ρᾶς KTA., “ΕἼ will be necessary to send on account of loans of seedcorn for the sowing,” etc., AécheZ 1001" © (Theran Doric —c. B.C. 200) no one may bring forward a proposal ὡς δεείσῃ διαλῦσαι τὸ κοινὸν εἰ τὰς θυσίας, P Flor II. 133" (A.D. 257) ἔδι μὲν ὑμᾶς μηδὲ…
Read the full entry →δέ (de) — then.
δέ,
but: adversative and copulative Particle,
I. answering to μέν (which see), τὴν νῦν μὲν Βοιωτίαν, πρότερον δὲ Καδμηίδα γῆν καλουμένην [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II. without preceding μέν,
II.1. adversative, expressing distinct opposition, αἰεί τοι τὰ κάκ᾽ ἐστὶ φίλα.. μαντεύεσθαι, ἐσθλὸν δ᾽ οὔτε τί πω εἶπας[Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in Prose, οὐκ ἐπὶ κακῷ, ἐλευθερώσει δέ.. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
II.2. copulative,
II.2. a in explanatory clauses, ξυνέβησαν.. τὰ μακρὰ τείχη ἑλεῖν (ἦν δὲ σταδίων μάλιστα ὀκτώ) [Refs 8th c.BC+]: when a substantive is followed by words in apposition, Ἀρισταγόρῃ τῷ Μιλησίῳ, δούλῳ δὲ ἡμετέρῳ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; so in answers, διπλᾶ λέγειν. —Answ. διπλᾶδ᾽ ὁρᾶν…
δέ
de
a primary particle (adversative or continuative); but, and,
etc.:--also, and, but, moreover, now (often unexpressed in English).
δέ
Cj.
but, on the other hand, and
δέ de 2x
a conjunctive particle, marking the superaddition of a clause, whether in opposition or in continuation, to what has preceded, and it may be variously rendered but, on the other hand, and, also, now, etc.; καὶ δέ, when there is a special superaddition in continuation, too, yea, etc. It sometimes is found at the commencement of the apodosis of a sentence, Acts 11:17. It serves also to mark the resumption of an interrupted discourse, 2 Cor. 2:10; Gal. 2:6
δέ but: conjunctive Particle, with adversative force: it commonly answers to μέν, and may often be rendered by while, whereas, on the other hand, v. μέν:— but μέν is often omitted, δέ being used merely to pass on from one thing to another; ὣς Ἀχιλεὺς θάμβησεν, θάμβησαν δὲ καὶ ἄλλοι Il.; etc.; κινεῖ κραδίην κινεῖ δὲ χόλον Eur.
δέ is often redundant,
to introduce the apodosis, where it may be rendered by then, yet, εἰ δέ κε μὴ δώωσιν, ἐγὼ δέ κεν αὐτὸς ἕλωμαι if they will not give it, then I will take it, Il.; so at in Lat., si tu oblitus es, at Dii meminerint Catull.
to resume after interruption caused by a parenthesis, where it may be rendered by I say, now, so then, Hdt.
POSITION of δέ: properly second, being often put between the Art. and Subst., the prep. and case.
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
2,937 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 2,787 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
2 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
πρῶτος (protos) is an adjective meaning 'first' in terms of time, order, or importance. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, often denoting rank or precedence, such as in Matthew 20:27 and Luke 14:18. The word can also function adverbially, as seen in John 1:42. Notably, it is sometimes used interchangeably with the comparative form πρότερος.
B. Superl., πρῶτος, -η, -ον,
[in LXX chiefly for רִאשׁוֹן, also for אֶחַד, etc.;]
first,
of Time or Place;
absol., as subst., ὁ π.., Lk 14:18, Jo 19:32, I Co 14:30; ὁ π. καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος, Re 1:17 2:8 22:13; neut., τὸ π., opp. to τ. δεύτερον, He 10:9; τὰ π., opp. to τ. ἔσχατα, Mt 12:45, Lk 11:26, II Pe 2:20; anarth., Mt 10:2; pl., Mt 19:30,
πρῶτος, -7, -ov, (super. of πρό, contr. fr. πρόατος, whence the Doric πρᾶτος ; the compar. πρότερος see in its place), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. for }}W8 and often for ἽΝ and wer, first; 1. either in time or place, in any succession of things or of persons; a. absolutely (i. e. without a noun) and substantively ; a. with the article: ὁ πρῶτος καὶ 6 ἔσχατος, i. 6. the eternal One, Rev. i. 17; ii. 8; xxii. 13; ὁ πρῶτος, sc. τῶν κεκλημένων, Lk. xiv. 18; the first of two (cf. W. § 35, 4 Ν. 1: [B. 32 (28}7), Jn. xix. 32; 1 Co. xiv. 30; plur. opp. to οἱ ἔσχαtot, Mt. xx. 16, on which see ἔσχατος. 3 ἃ. Neut. τὸ πρῶτον, opp. to τὸ δεύτερον, Heb. x. 9; τὰ πρῶτα, opp. to τὰ ἔσχατα, one’s first state, Mt. xii. 45; Lk. xi. 26; 2 Pet. ii. 20; the first order of things, Rey. xxi. 4. B. without the article: Mt. x. 2 (πρῶτος, sc. of the apostles to be mentioned); plur., Mt. xix. 80; Mk. x. 31; Lk. xiii.…
Read the full entry →πρῶτος. In the LXX regularly (Thackeray Gr. i. p. 183) and in the Kow7y frequently, especially in the Ptolemaic period, πρῶτος stands for πρότερος, so reversing the usual Hellenistic rule that the comparative does duty for both degrees of comparison. For an ex. almost contemporary with the NT we may cite P Oxy II. 2979 (A.D. 54), where a man asks for information for a supplementary return of lambs born since the first or former return for the year had been made— παρὰ τὴν πρώτην ἀπογραφήν. No stress can, therefore, be laid on the use of πρῶτος in Ac 1, as if Luke meant to write a third treatise (cf. Ramsay Paz/, p. 28). To illustrate Jn 125, 1518, we may quote P Leid W*# 49 τερον ἀντέστη αὐτῷ, λέγων᾽ σοῦ πρῶτός εἶμι, “‘ prior sum quam tu.” Abbott (ολ. Gr. p. 510f.) suggests that the Leiden papyrus may have been dependent on Jn 1, and translates the latter passage ‘‘my Chief” (76. p. 11…
Read the full entry →πρῶτος (prōtos) — first.
πρῶτος, η, ον,
see at {πρότερος} [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πρῶτος (prōtos) — first: previous.
πρῶτος, η, ον,
see at {πρότερος} [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πρῶτος (prōtos) — first: chief.
πρῶτος, η, ον,
see at {πρότερος} [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πρῶτος (prōtos) — first: best.
πρῶτος, η, ον,
see at {πρότερος} [Refs 5th c.BC+]
πρῶτος
protos
contracted superlative of 4253; foremost (in time, place, order or
importance):--before, beginning, best, chief(-est), first (of all),
former.
see GREEK for 4253
πρῶτος, η, ον
Adj
first, before
Adj-ASF-S — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-ASF-S Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine Degree: Superlative
furst ('echadh, ri'shon; proton, to proton, protos):
Of these words, which are those most frequently used for "first," ri'shon is from rosh, "the head, and is used for the highest, chief, etc.; also of time, the beginning, e.g. Ge 8:13, in the first month"; in Isa 44:6; 48:12, it is used of Yahweh as Eternal and solely Supreme--the First and the Last (compare Isa 41:4). Special usages are in connection with "firstborn," "first- fruit," etc.; proton is used of that which is first in order; but also of that which is first or chief in importance, etc. (Mt 6:33; Jas 3:17). In
164 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 15 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 98 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 121 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τῶν τε γὰρ ἀπὸ μονάδος πρῶτος τέλειός ἐστιν ἰσούμενος τοῖς ἑαυτοῦ μέρεσι καὶ συμπληρούμενος ἐξ αὐτῶν, ἡμίσους μὲν τριάδος, τρίτου δὲ δυάδος, ἕκτου δὲ μονάδος, καὶ ὡς ἔπος εἰπεῖν ἄρρην τε καὶ θῆλυς εἶναι πέφυκε κἀκ τῆς ἑκατέρου δυνάμεως ἥρμοσται·
ἰστέον οὖν, ὅτι πάντων ἐκεῖνος ἀναγκαιότατον ἡγήσατο τῷ καὶ τὸν ἑαυτοῦ μέλλοντι βίον οἰκονομήσειν καλῶς καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις νομοθετεῖν θεοῦ πρῶτον φύσιν κατανοῆσαι καὶ τῶν ἔργων τῶν ἐκείνου θεατὴν τῷ νῷ γενόμενον οὕτως παράδειγμα τὸ πάντων ἄριστον…
λέγει δὲ κύριος: Ἰδού, ποιῶ τὰ ἔσχατα ὡς τὰ πρῶτα.
Ἐφάρμοστος δέλφακας β οὓς Ἰναρῶς ἀπήγαγεν αὐτῶι εἰς Φιλάδελφον καὶ τούτων α ἀπὸ τῆς πρώτης λογείας καὶ ἄλλος τῆς ἐσχάτης … δέλφακες β οὓς ἀπήνεγκε παρʼ Ἰμούθου εἰς Φιλάδελφον
καὶ οἱ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ πρώτου λεπτοῦ χ … καὶ … σοῦχος ἡγεμὼν καὶ … υχος οὐραγὸς καὶ Πανεχῶτις
Νήσῳ τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοείτου νομοῦ. ὁμολογεῖ Πακῦσις Στοτοήτεως πρεσβυτέρου τοῦ Πανεφρίμεως ἱερεὺς πρώτης φυλῆς Σοκνοπαίου θεοῦ μεγάλου μεγάλου ὡς ἐτῶν μα οὐλὴ βραχίωνι ἀριστερῶι τῷ ἑαυτοῦ ὁμοπατρίωι
φυλακή (phulakē) refers to a guarding or watch, often associated with the act of keeping watch or the place where individuals are held, such as a prison. It encompasses meanings related to security, custody, and the time divisions of night. The New Testament uses it in contexts of imprisonment (e.g., Mt 14:10) and as a watch during the night (e.g., Lk 12:38).
φυλακή, -ῆς, ἡ
(< φυλάσσω)
[in LXX chiefly for מִשְׁמֶרֶת and cogn. forms, also for כֶּלֶא etc. ;]
actively, a guarding, guard, watch (Hom., Plat., Xen., al.): cogn. acc., φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep watch, Lk 2:8;
of those who keep watch (as also Lat. custodia), a guard; pl., sentinels, a guard (Hom., al.): Ac 12:10;
φυλακή, -js, ἡ, (φυλάσσω), fr. Hom. down, Sept. for NNW, Ww, 71D (a prison), x52 (enclosure, confinement), guard, watch, i. e. a. in an act. sense, a watching, keeping watch: φυλάσσειν φυλακάς, to keep watch, Lk. ii. 8 (often in the Grk. writ. fr. Xen. an. 2, 6, 10, etc.; Plat. lege. 6 p. 758 ἃ. down; [οἵ. φυλακὰς ἔχειν, ete. fr. Hom. (Il. 9, 1 ete.) on]; often also in Sept. for Το Ww). b. like the Lat. custodia and more freq. the plur. custodiae (see Klotz, Hdwrbch. [or Harpers’ Lat. Dict.] s.v.), iq. persons keeping watch, a guard, sentinels: Acts xii. 10 [here A. V. ward] (and very often in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down). c. of the place where captives are kept, a prison: Mt. xiv. 10; xxy. 36, [39], 43 sq.; Mk. vi. 17, 27 (28); Lk. iii. 20; xxi. 12; xxii.33; Actsv.19, 22; vili.3; xii. ὅ 5α. 17; xvi. 27,40; xxii.4; xxvi. 10; 2 Co. vi. 5 [here, as in ΗΘ}. xi. 36, A. V. imprisonment]; 2 Co.…
Read the full entry →φυλακή. (1) For φυλακή in the general sense of ‘‘ care,” “charge,” of a thing: P Lille I. 78 (iii/B.c.) ἐπιζητήσαντος αὐτοῦ βυβλάριά τινα, ἃ ἐδεδώκειν ἐν φυ(λακῆι) ““1] me réclama de petits livres qu’il m’avait donnés en garde.” (2) ‘‘ watch,” “‘guard”’: P Tebt II. 2827 (late ii/B.c.) a guard declares that he will keep the best watch possible upon other people’s holdings—ov(Aakiv) ἀλ[λο]τρ[{1ὧν κλή(ρων) συντηιρήσιν ἀπὸ τίο]ῦ BeAti
φυλακή (phulakē) — prison/watch: prison.
φῠλᾰκ-ή, ἡ,
(φύλαξ) watching or guarding, especially by night, φυλακῆς μνήσασθε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς ἔχειν keep watch and ward, [Refs]; φ. κατέχειν [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὴ ἔχει αὐτόν watching engages him, variant in [Refs 8th c.BC+] tell an unarmed man to stand on the defensive, i.e. to give commands that cannot be obeyed, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὅπως ἀφανὴς εἴη ἡ φ. that there might be nothing visible to watch, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς φυλάξειν keep watch and ward, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; φυλακὰς καταστήσασθαι, κατασκευάσασθαι, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. watch or guard, of persons, [NT+5th c.BC+]; φ. τοῦ σώματος a body guard, [Refs 5th c.BC+], etc.; garrison of a place or fortress, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ…
φυλακή
phulake
from 5442; a guarding or (concretely, guard), the act, the person;
figuratively, the place, the condition, or (specially), the time (as a
division of day or night), literally or figuratively:--cage, hold,
(im-)prison(-ment), ward, watch.
see GREEK for 5442
φυλακή, ῆς, ἡ
n.f.
a watching, guard, prison, imprisonment
φυλακή phylakē 47x
a keeping watch, ward, guard, Lk. 2:8; a place of watch, Rev. 18:2; a watch, guard, body of guards, Acts 12:10; ward, custody, imprisonment, 2 Cor. 6:5; 11:23; Heb. 11:36; prison, 1 Pet. 3:19; a place of custody, prison, Mt. 14:10; 25:39, 44; a watch or division, of the night, which in the time of our Savior was divided into watches of three hours each, called ὀψέ, μεσονύκτιον, ἀλεκτοροψωνία and πρωία, or πρωί, Mt. 14:25; 24:43;
φυλακή φυ^λα^κή, ἡ, φυλάσσω a watching or guarding, watch, guard, ward, esp. by night, φυλακῆς μνήσασθε keep watch and ward, Il.; so, φυλακὰς ἔχειν id. Il.; ὅπως ἀφανὴς εἴη ἡ φ. that there might be nothing visible to watch, Thuc.; φυλακὴν φυλάττειν to keep watch, Xen.; τὰς φ. ποιεῖσθαι id. Xen.; φυλακὰς καταστήσασθαι to set watches, Ar.
a watch or guard, of persons, Plat., Xen., etc.; ἡ τοῦ σώματος φ. a body guard, Dem.:— a guard or garrison, Hdt.; ἡ ἐν τῇ Ναυπάκτῳ φ., of a squadron of ships, Thuc.
of place, a watch, station, post, Il., Xen.
of time, a watch of the night, Hdt., Eur., etc.
a place for keeping others in, a ward, prison, Anth., NTest.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
gard:
(1) sar ha-Tabbachim, "captain of the guard," literally, "slaughterers" (Ge 37:36; 39:1; 40:3,1; 41:10,12); rabh Tabbachim (2Ki 25:8,11,20; Jer 39:9, etc.); rabh tabbachayyah (Da 2:14); ratsim, "guard," the King James Version "footmen" (1Sa 22:17); sare ha-ratsim, "chief of the guard" the King James Version "captains of the guard" (1Ki 14:27); ta' ha-ratsim, "guard-chamber" (1Ki 14:28; compare Eze 40:21, etc., where "lodges" are "guardrooms"; see A.B.…
Guard
(1.) Heb. tabbah (properly a “cook,” and in a secondary sense “executioner,” because this office fell to the lot of the cook in Eastern countries), the bodyguard of the kings of Egypt (Gen. 37:36) and Babylon (2 Kings 25:8; Jer. 40:1; Dan. 2:14).
(2.) Heb. rats, properly a “courier,” one whose office was to run before the king’s chariot (2 Sam. 15:1; 1 Kings 1:5). The couriers were also military guards (1 Sam. 22:17; 2 Kings 10:25). They were…
→ See WATCHMAN
48 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 46 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 71 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἡ μὲν οὖν εὐθιξία θέσις ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, ἡ δὲ ἐπιμονὴ πρᾶξις τῶν καλῶν [τὸ ἐργάζεσθαι τὰ καλά], ἡ δὲ μνήμη φυλακὴ καὶ διατήρησις τῶν ἁγίων δογμάτων.
Οἱ μὲν οὖν ἱππεῖς παραλαβόντες τὸν Βενιαμὶν ἦγον πρὸς Ἰώσηπον καὶ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἑπομένων, ὁ δὲ τὸν μὲν ἰδὼν ἐν φυλακῇ, τοὺς δʼ ἐν πενθίμοις σχήμασι, τί δή, φησίν, ὦ κάκιστοι, φρονήσαντες ἢ περὶ τῆς ἐμῆς φιλανθρωπίας ἢ περὶ τοῦ θεοῦ τῆς προνοίας…
λέγει οὖν ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ κύριος, ὁ θεός σου, ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ κρατήσω τῆς χειρός σου καὶ ἐνισχύσω σε, καὶ ἔδωκά σε εἰς διαθήκην γένους, εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλῶν καὶ ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ δεσμῶν πεπεδημένους καὶ ἐξ οἴκου φυλακῆς…
τῆς τούτων ἀπαιτήσεως οὐ μετρίως ἐσκυλμένος ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ, ἀπὸ τοῦ τόπου συνόδου … μετὰ φυλακῆς τόπον ἐκ τόπου μεταγειοχότων καὶ ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου πρα … ησων ἀπʼ ὀλίγων
τας φάσκοντες τὸν πατέρα αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ ζῆν μεθεστακέναι πρὸς … λο … κατὰ φυλακὴν. καταστάντες δὲ καὶ ἀπολογησάμενοι ἐφάνημεν τῶι Κόρδωι ἀθῶιοι τῆς συκοφαντίας, ὥστε εἰ μὴ ἐξ
ἄλλος μητρὸς τῆς αὐτῆς συντάξιμον τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἔτους Θεαδελφίας δραχμὰς ὀκτώ, γίνονται δραχμαὶ η, φυλακῆς δραχμὴν μίαν διώβολον, ἐπιμερισμοῦ ἀπόρων τρεισκαιδεκάτου ἔτους δραχμὰς δύο ἡμιώβολον δεσμοφυλάκων ἡμιώβολον χαλκοῦς β,
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
δεύτερος (deuteros) means 'second' in order, time, or rank. It can be used as an adjective or adverb, indicating a sequence or repetition, such as 'second time' or 'in the second place.' The New Testament uses it in various contexts, including Matthew 22:26 and Acts 7:13. The lexicons do not show significant disagreement on its meanings.
δεῦτερος, -α, -ον,
second in order, with or without idea of time: Mt 22:26, 39, al.; θάνατος, Re 2:11 20:14 21:8; χάρις, II Co 1:15. In neut. as adv., secondly, a second time; opp. to πρῶτον: Jo 3:4 21:16, I Co 12:28, Re 19:3; τὸ δ., II Co 13:2, Ju 5; ἐν τ. δ., at the second time: Ac 7:13; in later usage (as I Mac 9:1), ἐκ δ., Mk 14:72, Jo 9:24, Ac 11:9, Read the full entry →
δεύτερος, -έρα, -epov, [fr. Hom. down; Curtius § 277], second: Mt. xxii. 26; Mk. xii. 21; Lk. xii. 38; Jn. iv. 54; Rev. iv. 7, etc.; the second, the other of two: Mt. xxii. 39; Mk. xii. 31; 1 Co. xv. 47; Tit. iii. 10; 2 Pet. iii. 1; Heb. viii. 7; x. 9; δεύτερος θάνατος (see θάνατος, 3), Rev. ii, 11; xx. 14; xxi. 8; δευτέρα χάρις in 2 Co. i. 15 is not a double benefit, but a second, opp. to the former which the Corinthians would have had if Paul in passing through Achaia into Macedonia had visited them πρότεpov, [WH txt. Trmrg. read δευτ. χαράν, q. ν.]. The neuter δεύτερον is used adverbially in the second place, a second time [cf. W. § 37,5 Note 1]: Jn. iii. 4; Rev. xix. 3; πάλιν is added, as often in Grk. writ. (see ἄνωθεν, fin.): Jn. xxi. 16; also τὸ δεύτερον, 2 Co. xiii. 2; Jude 5; ἐκ δευτέρου (1 Mace. ix. 1), Mk. xiv. 72; Jn. ix. 24; Acts xi. 9; Heb. ix. 28; ef. W. § 51, 1d.; with…
Read the full entry →δεύτερος. For δεύτερον = “‘in the second place,” as in 1 Cor 12°, ef. P Tebt 1. 562° (late ii/B.c.) καλῶς οὖν ποήσῃς εὐχαριστῆσαι πρῶτον μὲν τοῖς θεοῖς δεύτερον δὲ σῶσαι ψυχὰς πολλάς KTA., “please therefore in the first place to give thanks [?—see s. τ. εὐχαριστέω] to the gods and secondly to save many lives, etc.”’ (Edd.) In P Tebt 11. 2977® (c. A.D. 123) we find ἐγ δευτέρου = “ἃ second time,’’ as in Mk 147 αἱ OGZS 299%? (c. B.C. 170) τῆι δεύτερον ἡμέραι is defended by Kaibel αὐ. Dittenberger z ἤθε... appealing to TMAe 1. 155% tar δεύτερον apépar μετὰ τὰ ἱερά, and the analogy of τῷ ὕστερον ἔτει and ἡ σήμερον ἡμέρα. In MGr δευτέρα is “ Monday”’ (ἡ δεύτερη = 2nd, fem. of δεύτερος and sharing its…
Read the full entry →δεύτερος (deuteros) — secondly.
δεύτερος, α, ον,
second, (perhaps from δύο with comparative termination):
I. next in Order (with a notion of Time), in [Refs 8th c.BC+] of one who comes in second in a race,[Refs]next, [Refs]; οὔ μ᾽ ἔτι δ. ὧδε ἵξετ᾽ ἄχος no second grief, i.e. none hereafter like this, [Refs]; as comparative, with genitive, ἐμεῖο δεύτεροι after my time, [Refs]; σοὶ δ᾽ οὐκέτι δ. ἔσται no second choice will be allowed thee, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; in Attic dialect and Trag. with Article, ὁ δ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; αἱ δ. πως φροντίδες σοφώτεραι second thoughts are wisest, [Refs 5th c.BC+] the next best way, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
I.2. of Time, next, later, δ. χρόνῳ in after time, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. ἡμέρῃ on the next day, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; δ. ἔτεϊ τούτων in the year after…
δεύτερος
deuteros
as the compare of 1417; (ordinal) second (in time, place, or rank;
also adverb):--afterward, again, second(-arily, time).
see GREEK for 1417
δεύτερος, α, ον
Adj & Adv.
second, in the second place, for the second time
δεύτερος second, being comp. of δύο:
in point of Order, of one who comes in second in a race, Il.: in attic with Art., ὁ δεύτερος Soph., etc.; αἱ δεύτεραι φροντίδες second thoughts, Eur.; proverb., τὸν δ. πλοῦν to try the next best way, Plat.
of Time, δευτέρηι ἡμέρηι on the next day, Hdt.: c. gen., ἐμεῖο δεύτερος after my time, Il.; δευτέρωι ἔτεϊ τούτων in the year after this, Hdt.: in neut. as adv., δεύτερον αὖ, δεύτερον αὖτις secondly, next, afterwards, a second time, Hom., attic; in Prose also δεύτερα:— with Art., τὸ δεύτερον Hdt., Aesch., etc.; τὰ δεύτερα Thuc.; ἐκ δευτέρου for the second time, NTest.
Read the full entry →Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
46 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 5 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 44 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 124 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ὀνομάζει δὲ καὶ ἡμέραν μετὰ τὴν γένεσιν αὐτοῦ δευτέραν, ὅλον ἡμέρας διάστημα καὶ μέτρον ἀνατιθεὶς οὐρανῷ διὰ τὴν ἐν αἰσθητοῖς ἀξίωσίν τε καὶ τιμήν.
Εὗρον τοίνυν, ὅτι Πτολεμαίων μὲν ὁ δεύτερος μάλιστα δὴ βασιλεὺς περὶ παιδείαν καὶ βιβλίων συναγωγὴν σπουδάσας ἐξαιρέτως ἐφιλοτιμήθη τὸν ἡμέτερον νόμον καὶ τὴν κατʼ αὐτὸν διάταξιν τῆς πολιτείας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φωνὴν μεταβαλεῖν,
Καὶ ἐποίησεν Ἰακὼβ ἐναλλὰξ τὰς χεῖρας αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐπέθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφαλὴν Ἐφραίμ, τοῦ δευτέρου καὶ νεωτέρου, καὶ εὐλόγησεν αὐτόν.
ν αἰγων β ἔτους ἑνὸς καὶ εἰκοστοῦ τῆς Καίσαρος κρατήσεως Θεοῦ υἱοῦ Σεβαστοῦ Δείου δευτέρᾳ καὶ εἰκάδι Θὼθ δευτέρᾳ καὶ εἰκάδι ἐν Πτολεμαίδι Εὐεργέτιδι τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου νομοῦ. ἐμίσθωσεν Γάιος
κη οὐλὴ μετώπῳ μετὰ κυρίου τοῦ ἀνδρὸς Στοτοήτεως Πακύσεως ὡς ἐτῶν λε οὐλὴ δακτύλῳ δευτέρῳ χειρὸς ἀριστερᾶς, ἀπέχειν παρʼ αὐτῆς τὸν ὁμολογοῦντα παραχρῆμα διὰ χειρὸς ἀπὸ ἀργυρίου δραχμῶν τριακοσίων
ἐκφορίου τοῦ παντὸς ἀσπερμεὶ τῷ μὲν πρώτῳ ἔτει πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν τριάκοντα δύο τῷ δὲ δευτέρῳ ἔτει ὁμοίως πυροῦ ἀρταβῶν τεσσαράκοντα καὶ θαλλοῦ κατʼ ἔτος ὁμοίως πυροῦ ἀρτάβης μιᾶς πάντων
The Greek word ἔρχομαι (i.e., *erchomai*) means 'to come' or 'to go.' It is used in various contexts, often indicating arrival or return, and can apply to both people and events. The New Testament frequently employs this term, notably in references to the coming of the Messiah (e.g., Mt 11:3). Lexicons note its use with various prepositions to indicate direction or purpose.
ἔρχομαι,
[in LXX very freq. for בּוֹא, also for הלךְ ni., אתה, etc., 34 words in all ;]
to come;
ἔρχομαι, impy. ἔρχου. ἔρχεσθε, (for the Attic ἴθι, tre fr. εἶμι); impf. ἠρχόμην (for ἤειν and ya more com. in Attic) ; fut. ἐλεύσομαι; ---- (on these forms cf. [esp. Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 103 sqq.; Veitch 5. v.]; Matthiae § 234; Bttm. Ausf. Spr. ii. 182 sq.; Kriiger § 40 5. v.; Kiihner §343; W.§ 15s. v.; [B. 58 (50)]); pf. ἐλήλυθα; plpf. ἐληλύθειν; 2 aor. ἦλθον and (occasionally by LT Tr WH [together or severally ]—as Mt. vi. 10; [vii. 25, 27; x.13; xiv. 34; xxv. 86; Mk. i. 29; vi. 29; Lk. i. 59; ii. 16; v. 7; Vi. 17; viii. 35; x1. 2; xxiii. 33; xxiv. 1,23]; Jn. [1.39 (40); iii. 26]; iv. 27; [xii. 97; Acts xii. 10; [xiv. 24]; xxviii. 14 sq. etc.) in the Alexandrian form ἦλθα (see ἀπέρχομαι init. for reff.); Sept. for x13, rarely for ANN and 72; [fr. Hom. down] ; I. to come; 1. prop. a. of persons; a. univ. to come from one place into another, and used both of persons arriving,—as in…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι. P Fay 123!5 (c A.D. 100) ἐλήλυθεν γὰρ Τεύφιλος ᾿Ιουδαῖος λέγων [ὅ]τι ἤχθην is γεωργίαν, ‘ Teuphilus the Jew has come saying, ‘I have been pressed in as a cultivator’” (Edd.) will serve as an instance of the ordinary use of this very common verb: the mention of the Jew Teuphilus (or Theophilus) is interesting. A few miscellaneous exx. may be added which illustrate NT constructions or phrases— with Jn 5*% cf. P Lond 427 (B.c. 168) (= I. p. 30, Se/ections, Ῥ. 10) εἰς πᾶν τι ἐληλυθυῖα διὰ τὴν τοῦ σίτου τιμήν, ‘ having come to the last extremity because of the high price of corn,” P Vat A® (B.c. 168) (= Witkowski’, p. 65) τοῦ παιδίου σου els τὰ ἔσχατα ἐληλυθότος, P Flor IL. 212° (A.D. 254) els τοσαύτην ἀτυχίαν ἦλθες. . . ὡς μὴ ἔχειν σε ἀρτά[β]ην μίαν λωτίνου: with Jn 939 cf. P Tor I. 1 ἴ1 39 (B.c. 116) ἔρχεσθαι ἐπὶ τὸ κριτήριον : with Jn 18, cf. the late P Iand I. 21% (vi/vii A.D.)…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι (erchomai) — to come/go.
ἔρχομαι
[Refs 8th c.BC+]: imperfect ἠρχόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]; frequently in later Prose, [LXX+NT+2nd c.AD+]; in Attic dialect rare even in compounds, ἐπ-ηρχόμην [Refs 5th c.BC+]future ἐλεύσομαι, [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect, Trag. [Refs 5th c.BC+], in Attic dialect Prose only in [Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist, Epic dialect and Lyric poetry ἤλῠθον [Refs 8th c.BC+]; but ἦλθον is more frequently even in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive ἐλθέμεναι, -έμεν, [Refs 8th c.BC+] unaugmented unless ἐξ-ελύθη [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect ἦνθον [Refs 5th c.BC+]; participle ἐνθών [Refs 6th c.BC+]; subjunctive ἔνθῃ [Refs]; Laconian dialect ἔλσῃ, ἔλσοιμι, ἐλσών, [NT+5th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural ἤλθοσαν [LXX+2nd c.BC+]; ἤλυθα [Refs 4th c.AD+]perfect ἐλήλῠθα (not in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; syncopated. plural ἐλήλῠμεν, -υτε, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect…
Read the full entry →ἔρχομαι
erchomai
middle voice of a primary verb
(used only in the present and imperfect tenses, the others being
supplied by a kindred (middle voice)
eleuthomai el-yoo'-thom-ahee, or (active)
eltho el'-tho,
which do not otherwise occur)
to come or go (in a great variety of applications, literally and
figuratively):--accompany, appear, bring, come, enter, fall out, go,
grow, X light, X next, pass, resort, be set.
ἔρχομαι
v.
I come, go
ἔρχομαι erchomai 632x
to come, to go, to pass. By the combination of this verb with other terms, a variety of meaning results, which, however, is due, not to a change of meaning in the verb, but to the adjuncts. Ὁ ἐρχόμενος, He who is coming, the expected Messiah, Mt. 11:3
ἔρχομαι to come or go, Hom., etc.
to come or go back, return, Od.; in full, αὖτις, ἄψ, πάλιν ἐλθεῖν id. Od.
c. acc. cogn., ὁδόν or κέλευθον ἐλθεῖν to go a journey, Hom., Aesch.; ἀγγελίην ἐλθεῖν to go a message, Il.
c. gen. loci, πεδίοιο ἐλθεῖν over or across the plain, id. Il.
c. part. fut., to denote the object, ἔρχομαι οἰσόμενος I go to fetch, id. Il.; μαρτυρήσων ἦλθον Aesch., etc.:—like an auxiliary Verb, ἔρχομαι λέξων I am going to tell, I intend to say (as in French je vais dire), Hdt.
the aor. part. ἐλθών is often added to another Verb, κάθηρον ἐλθών come and cleanse, Il., etc.
Post-Homeric phrases:
εἰς λόγους ἔρχεσθαί τινι to come to speech with, Hdt., Soph.
Verb-2AAI-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · pluralsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
642 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 91 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 635 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 423 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
καὶ γὰρ εὔλογον τῷ ὄντι πρῶτον αὐτὸν εἰς γένεσιν ἐλθεῖν, ἄριστόν τε ὄντα τῶν γεγονότων κἀκ τοῦ καθαρωτάτου τῆς οὐσίας παγέντα, διότι θεῶν ἐμφανῶν τε καὶ αἰσθητῶν ἔμελλεν οἶκος ἔσεσθαι ἱερώτατος.
ταύτης δʼ ὑπʼ ὄψιν οὐκ ἐρχομένης, ἀλλὰ βαθεῖ μὲν κρυπτομένης σκότει, πνεύματος δʼ αὐτὴν ἄνωθεν ἐπιθέοντος, γενέσθαι φῶς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ θεός.
ὅτε δὲ τοὺς ἰδίους ἀποστόλους τοὺς μέλλοντας κηρύσσειν τὸ εὐαγγέλιον αὐτοῦ ἐξελέξατο, ὄντας ὑπὲρ πᾶσαν ἁμαρτίαν ἀνομωτέρους, ἵνα δείξῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἦλθεν καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλούς, τότε ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν εἶναι υἱὸν θεοῦ.
καὶ ἵνʼ ἀεὶ διδῶσιν οἱ ἐκεῖθεν ποιά τινα· τὴν δὲ τιμὴν αὐτοῦ ὡς ἂν ἔλθῃς δώσουσι. καί, εἰ δυνατόν, Ἕρμωνα πρόδομα λαβεῖν ἄχρι τῶν Λαμέδοντος.
καὶ ἐν τῶι β ἔτει … τῆι ζ εἰς τὴν η ἦλθεν μετά μεθυόντων … τινων καὶ ἔκρουσεν τὴν θύραν κελεύων ἄνοιξον ἵνα πίωμεν. ἐμοῦ δὲ
παρὰ τοῖς ἐν Πηλουσίωι θεοῖς. καλῶς ποιήσεις διαλύσας Ἁρκοννῆσιν καὶ Ψενανοῦπιν καὶ … … ελθεῖν ἐπὶ προ … ους καὶ γραψάτωσαν ἡμῖν ὑπὲρ ὧν ἐσπούδασας διὰ τὰς ἡμῶν παρακλήσεις
The Greek word ἐπί (epi) is a preposition that indicates a relationship of superposition, often translated as 'on,' 'upon,' or 'over.' It can govern the genitive, dative, or accusative cases, covering meanings related to place, time, authority, and various figurative uses. In the New Testament, it frequently appears with the accusative case, especially in contexts of motion or direction, such as in Matthew 14:28.
ἐπί (before a smooth breathing ἐπ’, before a rough breathing ἐφ’),
prep. c. gen., dat., acc. (acc. most freq. in NT),
with primary sense of superposition, on, upon.
C. gen.,
of place, answering the question, where?
of the place on which, on, upon: ἐπὶ (τ.) γῆς, Mt 6:10, 19, al.; τ. κεφαλῆς, I Co 11:10; τ. νεφελῶν, Mt 24:30, al.; like ἐν, in constr. praegn. after verbs of motion: βάλλειν, Mk 4:26; σπείρειν, ib. 31; ἔρχεσθαι, He 6:7, al.; fig., ἐπ’ ἀληθείας (MM, s.v. ἀ.); of the subject of thought or speech, Ga 3:16; of power or authority, over, πάντων,
ἐπί, [before a rough breathing ἐφ᾽ (occasionally in Mss. én’; see 6. g. Ps. exly. (exlvi.) 3), and also in some instances before a smooth breathing (as ἐφ᾽ ἐλπίδι, Acts ii. 26 L; Ro. viii. 20 (21) Tdf.); 566 ἀφεῖδον. It neglects elision before proper names beginning with a vowel (exe. Αἴγυπτον Acts vii. 10, 18) and (at least in Tdf.’s txt.) before some other words, see the Proleg. p. 94 sq.; cf. W. §5,1a.; B. p. 10], a preposition [fr. the Skr. local prefix dpi; Curtius $335], joined to the gen., the dat., and the ace. ; its primary signification is upon (Lat. super; [cf. W. 374 (350) note). A. with the Genitive [cf. W. § 47, g.; B. 336 (289)]; I. of Place; and 1. of the place on which; a. upon the surface of (Lat. in or super with the abl., Germ. auf with the dat.); after verbs of abiding, remaining, standing, going, coming, etc.; of doing anything: ἐπὶ κλίνης, Mt. ix. 2; Lk. xvii. 34…
Read the full entry →ἐπὶ ξένης εἶναι, and P Giss I. 2115 μένε ἐπὶ ἑαυτοῦ, “stay at home.” The sense of ‘‘near,’’ “‘in the vicinity of”’ appears in P Ryl II. 127° (A.D. 29) κοιμωμένον μον ἐπὶ τῆς θύρας: cf. Ac 5°% and see Jn 6᾽", 211 ἐπὶ τῆς θαλάσσης, where the rendering ‘“‘ near the sea,’ or, as we should say, “fon the shore,” is to be preferred (cf. Abbott /ok. Gr. p- 261). In P Lond 11688 (a.p. 18) (= III. p. 136) ἐν τοῖς ἀπὸ A(Bos μέρεσι ἐπὶ ταῖς οὔσαις γειτνίαις, ἐπί is almost = ἐν." The local force still underlies the meaning of such a phrase as ἐπ᾿ ἀληθείας (cf. Mk 1214) in the census paper P Oxy II. 255}5 (A.D. 48) (= Selections, p. 47), where it is stated that the return is ‘“‘sound”’ and rests “on a true basis "᾿-ἐ]ξ [ὑ]γιοῦς kal ἐπ᾽ ἀληθείας. Cf. also P Lille I. 264 (iii/B.c.) τὴν δὲ λοιπὴν γ[ῆν ἑτο]ιμάζω, εἰ μὴ ἀκολουθεῖς ἅπαντα καθὼς ἐπὶ τῆς διαγραφῆς τ[ο]ῦ [εἰς τὸ] τε ἔτος σπόρου μεμισθῶσϑαι…
Read the full entry →ἐπί (epi) — upon/to/against.
ἐπί,
Thess. (before τ) [Refs 3rd c.BC+], to denote the being upon or supported upon a surface or point.
__A WITH GEN.:
__A.I of Place,
__A.I.1 with Verbs of Rest, upon, [Refs 8th c.BC+]: without a Verb expressed, ἔγχεα ὄρθ᾽ ἐ. σαυρωτῆρος (i.e. σταθέντα) [Refs]; ἔκλαγξαν ὀϊστοὶ ἐπ᾽ ὤμων the arrows on his shoulders, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: also with Verbs of Motion, where the subject rests upon something, as on a chariot, a horse, a ship, φεύγωμεν ἐφ᾽ ἵππων on our chariot, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; τὴν κλεῖδα περιφέρειν ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ to carry the key about on his person, [Refs 5th c.BC+] walk on tiptoe, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of places, upon, if the place is an actual support, [Refs]; ἐ. τοῦ εὐωνύμον on the left, ἐ. τῶν πλευρῶν on the flanks, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; but most frequently, in, rarely in [Refs 8th c.BC+] in the country. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐπ᾽ οἰκήματος κατίσαι…
ἐπί
epi
a primary preposition; properly, meaning superimposition (of time,
place, order, etc.), as a relation of distribution (with the genitive
case), i.e. over, upon, etc.; of rest (with the dative case) at, on,
etc.; of direction (with the accusative case) towards, upon,
etc.:--about (the times), above, after, against, among, as long as
(touching), at, beside, X have charge of, (be-, (where-))fore, in (a
place, as much as, the time of, -to), (because) of, (up-)on (behalf
of), over, (by, for) the space of, through(-out), (un-)to(-ward),
with. In compounds it retains essentially the same import, at, upon,
etc. (literally or figuratively).
ἐπί
Prep.
on, to, against, on the basis of, at
ἐπί epi 890x
(1) with the gen., upon, on, Mt. 4:6; 9:2; 27:19; in, of locality, Mk. 8:4; near upon, by, at, Mt. 21:19; Jn. 21:1; upon, over, of authority, Mt. 2:22; Acts 8:27; in the presence of, especially in a judicial sense, 2 Cor. 7:14; Acts 25:9; in the case of, in respect of, Jn. 6:2; Gal. 3:16; in the time of, at the time of, Read the full entry →
ἐπί
on, upon with gen., dat., and acc.
prep. with gen., dat., and acc.: Radic. signf. upon.
WITH GEN.:
of Place,
with Verbs of Rest, upon or on, κεῖσθαι ἐπὶ χθονός Il.; ἐφ᾽ ἵππου on horse-back, etc.; ἐπὶ γῆς upon earth, Soph.; ἐπ᾽ ἀγροῦ in the country, Od.; also at or near, ἐπὶ Λήμνου off Lemnos, Hdt., etc.:—with Verbs of motion, the sense is pregnant, ἐπ᾽ ἠπείροιο ἔρυσσαν drew the ship upon the land and left it there, Il., etc.; ἀναβῆναι ἐπὶ τῶν πύργων Xen.
not strictly of Place, μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ἀρχῆς to remain in the command, id. Xen.; ἐπὶ τῶν πραγμάτων engaged in business, Dem.: —of ships, ὁρμεῖν ἐπ᾽ ἀγκύρας to ride at (i. e. in dependence on an) anchor, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
907 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 46 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 886 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
εἶθ’ ὕδατος ἀσώματον οὐσίαν καὶ πνεύματος καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσιν ἑβδόμου φωτός, ὃ πάλιν ἀσώματον ἦν καὶ νοητὸν ἡλίου παράδειγμα καὶ πάντων ὅσα φωσφόρα ἄστρα κατὰ τὸν οὐρανὸν ἔμελλε συνίστασθαι.
ὡς Ἅβραμος ἐπὶ τοὺς Ἀσσυρίους ἐκστρατεύσας ἐνίκησε καὶ τοὺς αἰχμαλώτους τῶν Σοδομιτῶν ἔσωσε καὶ τὴν λείαν ἣν ἔλαβον ἀφείλετο.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ
καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης
ἐδέξατο Πακοῖβις ὁ πριάμενος. Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word πύλη (i.e., *pylē*) means 'gate' and is often used to refer to the gates of a city or a larger entrance, as opposed to a house-door. It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, including metaphorical uses related to access or entrance, such as the 'gates of Hades.' The word is derived from a primary root and is frequently found in both singular and plural forms.
πύλη, -ns, 7, [perh. fem. of πόλος (cf. Eng. pole i. 6. axis) fr. r. wéA-@ to turn (Curtius p. 715)], fr. Hom. down; Sept. very often for yw, occasionally for 7, sometimes for M3; a gate (of the larger sort, in the wall either of a city ora palace; Thom. Mag. [p. 292, 4] πύλαι ἐπὶ τείχους - θύραι ἐπὶ οἰκίας) : of a town, Lk. vii. 12; Acts ix. 24; xvi. 13 LT Tr WH; Heb. xiii. 12; of the temple, Acts iii. 10; in the wall of a prison, Acte xil. 10; πύλαι Gdov, the gates of Hades (likened to a vast prison; hence the ‘ keys’ of Hades, Rev. i. 18), Mt. xvi. 18 (on which see κατισχύω) ; Sap. xvi. 18; 8 Mace. v. 51, and often by prof. writ.; see Grimm on 3 Mace. v.51. ἰπ fig. disc. i. q. access or entrance into any state: Mt. vii. 13°, 13
πύλη. P Oxy VI. 892° (A.p. 338) βορρινὴν πύλην τῆς πόλεως, “north gate of the city.’’ For πύλη followed by the name of a village in custom-house receipts cf. P Fay 681 (a.p. 158) τετέλίεσται) δι(ὰ) πύλ(ης) Διονυ(σιάδος) ἐρηίμοφυλακίας), and see GH p. 195 ff. For the irregular dat. plur. in 3 Kingd 221° A, see Psaltes Gr. p. 174.
πύλη (pulē) — gate.
πύλη [ῠ], ἡ,
properly one wing of a pair of double gates, ὀλίγον τι παρακλίναντες τὴν ἑτέρην π. [Refs 5th c.BC+]: mostly in plural, gates of a town (whereas θύρα = house-door), Σκαιαὶ π. [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἄνεσάν τε π. καὶ ἀπῶσαν ὀχῆας[Refs 5th c.BC+]: plural of several gates, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ἐν πύλαις in or at the gates, [Refs]; ἐπὶ ταῖς πύλαισιν, οὗ τὸ τάριχος ὤνιον [Refs 5th c.BC+]
2. in Trag. sometimes of the house-door, δωμάτων πύλαι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; γυναικείους π. gate or door leading to the women's apartments,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: also in singular,[Refs]; of the door of a tent, [Refs]
3. πύλαι Ἀΐδαο the gates of the nether world, periphrasticfor hell, [NT+8th c.BC+]
πύλη
pule
apparently a primary word; a gate, i.e. the leaf or wing of a folding
entrance (literally or figuratively):--gate.
πύλη, ης, ἡ
n.f.
a door, gate
πύλη pylē 10x
a gate, Mt. 7:13, 14; Lk. 7:12; Acts 12:10; πύλαι ᾅδου, the gates of hades, the nether world and its powers, the powers of destruction, dissolution, Mt. 16:18
πύλη πψ́λη, ἡ, one wing of a pair of double gates, Hdt.: mostly in pl. the gates of a town, opp. to θύρα (a house-door), Il., attic
in Trag., sometimes, of the house-door.
Ἀΐδαο πύλαι, periphr. for the nether world, hell, Hom., Aesch., etc.
generally, an entrance, of the liver, π. καὶ δοχαὶ χολῆς the orifice and receptacle of gall, Eur.
an entrance into a country through mountains, a mountain-pass, Hdt.: esp. Πύλαι, ῶν, αἱ, the common name for Θερμοπύλαι, the pass round the mountains from Thessaly to Locris, considered the gates of Greece, id. Hdt.; so, of the pass from Syria into Cilicia, Xen., etc.
also of narrow straits, by which one enters a broad sea, ἐπ᾽ αὐταῖς λίμνης π., of the Thracian Bosporus, Aesch.; ἐν πύλαις, of the Euripus, Eur.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
gat (Hebrew normally (over 300 times) sha`ar; occasionally deleth, properly, "gateway" (but compare De 3:5); elsewhere the gateway is pethach (compare especially Ge 19:6); Aramaic tera`; Greek pulon, pule; the English Revised Version and the King James Version add caph, "threshold," in 1Ch 9:19,22; and the King James Version adds delathayim, "double-door," in Isa 45:1; thura, "door," Ac 3:2):
(1) The usual gateway was provided with double doors, swung on projections that fitted into sockets in the sill and lintel. Ordinarily the material was wood (Ne 2:3,17), but greater…
Gate
(1.) Of cities, as of Jerusalem (Jer. 37:13; Neh. 1:3; 2:3; 3:3), of Sodom (Gen. 19:1), of Gaza (Judg. 16:3).
(2.) Of royal palaces (Neh. 2:8).
(3.) Of the temple of Solomon (1 Kings 6:34, 35; 2 Kings 18:16); of the holy place (1 Kings 6:31, 32; Ezek. 41:23, 24); of the outer courts of the temple, the beautiful gate (Acts 3:2).
The gate and gateways of eastern cities anciently held and still hold an important part, not only in the defence but in the public economy of the place. They are thus sometimes taken as representing the city itself. (Genesis 22:17; 24:60; 12:12; Judges 5:8; Ruth 4:10; Psalms 87:2; 122:2) Among the special purposes for which they were used may be mentioned. As places of public resort. (Genesis 19:1; 23:10; 34:20; 24; 1 Samuel 4:18) etc. Places for public deliberation, administration of Justice, or of audience for kings and rulers or ambassadors. (16:18; 21:19; 25:7;
The gates of eastern walled towns were usually of wood, Jud 16:3, often covered with thick plates of iron or copper, Ps 107:16 Isa 45:2 Ac 12:10, secured by bolts and bars, De 3:5 1Ki 4:13, and flanked by towers, 2Sa 18:24,33. A city was usually regarded as taken when its gates were won, De 28:52 Jud 5:8. Hence "gate" sometimes signifies power, dominion; almost in the same sense as the Turkish sultan’s…
10 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 2 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 10 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 180 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ἐὰν γάρ τινι“ φησίν „υἱὸς ᾖ ἀπειθὴς καὶ ἐρεθιστὴς οὐχ ὑπακούων φωνῆς πατρὸς καὶ μητρός, καὶ παιδεύωσιν αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ εἰσακούῃ αὐτῶν, συλλαβόντες αὐτὸν ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ ἐξάξουσιν εἰς τὴν γερουσίαν τῆς πόλεως αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν πύλην τοῦ τόπου…
τῆς δὲ τετάρτης πλευρᾶς, πεντήκοντα γὰρ οὖσα πήχεων ἡ ἑτέρα μέτωπον τοῦ παντὸς ἦν, εἴκοσι μὲν πήχεις ἀνεῴγεσαν κατὰ πύλας, ἐν αἷς ἀνὰ δύο κάμακες εἱστήκεσαν κατὰ μίμησιν πυλώνων.
καὶ πάλιν λέγει ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ πορεύσομαι ἔμπροσθέν σου καὶ ὄρη ὁμαλιῶ καὶ πύλας χαλκᾶς συντρίψω καὶ μοχλοὺς σιδηροῦς συγκλάσω, καὶ δώσω σοι θησαυροὺς σκοτεινούς, ἀποκρύφους, ἀοράτους, ἵνα γνῶσιν ὅτι ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεός.
τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Βακχιάδος λιμένος Μέμφεως Νιννᾶς ἐξάγων φοίνικος ὄνον ἕνα ἀρτάβας τέσσαρας . ἔτους ἐνάτου Τραιανοῦ
r τετελώνηται διὰ πύλης Φιλαδελφίας ἑκατοστὸν Οὐνώφριος ἐξάγων ὄνον φοίνικος ἀρτάβας δύο β. ἔτους ιδ Αὐτοκράτορος Καίσαρος Τραιανοῦ
Στοτοήτεως Πανομιέως ἱερέως ἀπὸ κώμης Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου τῆς Ἡρακλείδου μερίδος τοῦ Ἀρσινοίτου νομοῦ Ἀραβοτοξότου πύλης τῆς αὐτῆς Σοκνοπαίου Νήσου. … … … ν κατηγορ … … ἀλλὰ ὁρῶν τὸν
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
σιδηροῦς is an adjective meaning 'made of iron.' It appears in various contexts in the New Testament, notably in Acts 12:10 and Revelation 2:27, among others. The term is derived from σίδηρος, which means 'iron.' Lexicons note its metaphorical use to describe something as hard or unyielding, as well as its application in ancient texts to describe physical objects made of iron.
σιδήρεος, -α, -ον (-οῦς, -ᾶ -οῦν)
(< σίδηρος),
[in LXX chiefly for בַּרְזֶל ;]
of iron: Ac 12:10, Re 2:27 9:9 12:5 19:15.†
σιδήρεος, -έα, -eov, contr. -οὖῦς, -a, -οῦν, (σίδηρος), fr. Hom. down, made of iron: Acts xii. 10; Rev. ii. 27; ix. OL ΡΟ ΩΣ σὸδιον Da
σιδήρεος, ‘‘made of iron” (Ac 1210. Rev 227, a/.): P Eleph 5’ (B.C. 284-3) λυχνία σιδηρᾶ a, P Oxy III. 52118F (ii/a.p.) βάδιλλος σιδ[ηροῦς), κάρκινος σιδηροῦς, ‘iron shovel, iron tongs,” 26. VII. 103518 (A.D. 143) τὸ ὑπάρχον αὐτῷ ζεῦγος κτενιστικὸν σιδηροῦν, ‘the combing instrument belonging to him, made of iron,” and P Lond 1164(/)® (A.p. 212) (=III. p. 164) πλοῖον... ἀνκύραις σιδηραῖς σὺν σπάθαις σιδηραῖς. The uncontracted form σιδηρέας occurs in 4 Macc 95 N*, and σιδηραίαις in 20.585 : see Thackeray Gr. 1. p. 173.
σιδήρεος (sidēreos) — iron.
σῐδήρ-εος, α,
Ionic dialect and Epic dialect η, ον, Attic dialect contraction σιδηροῦς, ᾶ, οῦν [Refs]; Epic dialect also σιδήρειος, η, ον, see below; also late, [Refs 6th c.AD+] (feminine -ειος[Refs 9th c.AD+]; Doric dialect σιδάρεος [ᾱ] [Refs 4th c.BC+], and see below 11, also σιδάριος [Refs 4th c.BC+]; Aeolic dialect σιδάριος [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—made of iron or steel, ἄξων [Refs 8th c.BC+]; χεὶρ σ. grappling-iron, [Refs 5th c.BC+], i.e. the clang of arms, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σ. οὐρανός the iron sky, the firmament, which the ancients held to be of metal, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; σ. γένος, of the [Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. metaphorically, ἦ γὰρ σοί γε σ. ἐν φρεσὶ θυμός a soul of iron, i.e. hard, stubborn as iron, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἦ ῥά νυ σοί γε σ. πάντα τέτυκται…
σιδηροῦς
sidereos
from 4604; made of iron:--(of) iron.
see GREEK for 4604
σιδήρεος, έα, εον
Adj
made of iron
σιδηροῦς sidērous 5x
made of iron, Acts 12:10; Rev. 2:27; 9:9; 12:5; 19:15*
σιδήρεος σι^δήρεος, α, ionic η, ον, epic σιδήρειος, η, ον σίδηρος made of iron or steel, iron, Lat. ferreus, Hom., etc.; χεὶρ σιδηρᾶ a grappling-iron, Thuc.:— σιδήρειος ὀρυμαγδός, i. e. the clang of arms, Il.; σιδήρεος οὐρανός the iron sky, the firmament, which the ancients held to be of metal, Od.
metaph., σιδήρεος ἐν φρεσὶ θυμός a soul of iron, i. e. hard as iron, Hom.; οἱ κραδίη σιδηρέη Od.; σοί γε σιδήρεα πάντα τέτυκται thou art iron all! id. Od.:—of Hercules, the ironside, Simon.; ὦ σιδήρεοι O ye ironhearted! Aeschin.
σιδάρεοι, οἱ, a Byzantine iron coin, always in doric form, Ar.
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
Iron
Tubal-Cain is the first-mentioned worker in iron (Gen. 4:22). The Egyptians wrought it at Sinai before the Exodus. David prepared it in great abundance for the temple (1 Chr. 22:3: 29:7). The merchants of Dan and Javan brought it to the market of Tyre (Ezek. 27:19). Various instruments are mentioned as made of iron (Deut. 27:5; 19:5; Josh. 17:16, 18; 1 Sam. 17:7; 2 Sam. 12:31; 2 Kings 6:5, 6; 1 Chr.…
is mentioned with brass as the earliest of known metals. (Genesis 4:22) The natural wealth in iron of the soil of Canaan is indicated by describing it as a land whose stones are iron." (8:9) (Recent explorations have shown that iron ore is abundant in the northern part of Palestine. --ED.) The book of Job contains passages which indicate that iron was a metal well known. Sheet-iron was used for cooking utensils. (Ezekiel 4:3) cf. Levi 7:9 That it was plentiful in the time of David appears from (1 Chronicles 22:3) The market of Tyre was supplied with bright or polished iron by the merchants of by Dan and Javan. (Ezekiel 27:19) The Chalybes of the Pontus were celebrated as…
Was early known and wrought, Ge 4:22. Moses often alludes to it. He compares the bondage in Egypt to a furnace for smelting iron, and speaks of the iron ore of Canaan, De 3:11 4:20 8:9. Many different articles and tools were anciently made of it. Immense quantities were provided for the building of the temple, 1Ch 29:2,7. "Iron" is used to illustrated slavery, strength, obstinacy, fortitude, affliction, etc., De 28:48 Job 40:18 Isa 48:4 Jer 1:18 Eze 22:18,20…
5 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 24 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
προσβλέψω δὲ τίσιν ὀφθαλμοῖς ὁ σιδηροῦς ἐγώ;
ἔδοξας ὁρᾶν ἀνδριάντα μέγαν ἑστῶτα, οὗ τὴν μὲν κεφαλὴν συνέβαινεν εἶναι χρυσῆν, τοὺς δὲ ὤμους καὶ τοὺς βραχίονας ἀργυροῦς, τὴν δὲ γαστέρα καὶ τοὺς μηροὺς χαλκέους, κνήμας δὲ καὶ πόδας σιδηροῦς.
καὶ πάλιν λέγει ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ πορεύσομαι ἔμπροσθέν σου καὶ ὄρη ὁμαλιῶ καὶ πύλας χαλκᾶς συντρίψω καὶ μοχλοὺς σιδηροῦς συγκλάσω, καὶ δώσω σοι θησαυροὺς σκοτεινούς, ἀποκρύφους, ἀοράτους, ἵνα γνῶσιν ὅτι ἐγὼ κύριος ὁ θεός.
Μᾶρκος δεκουρίων Σαβίνωι χαίρειν. δὸς Κρονίωνι πασσάλους β σιδηροῦς καὶ πέντε ξύλα εἰς κλίμακα καὶ σχοινία λεπτά. Cubilio salutem cados mitte paleas u
ὁ ἀδελφός, ὃς ἐνετείλατο αὐτῷ πέμψαι σε … , κύριέ μου πάτερ, ἧς σιδηρᾶ … … ἀλλὰ μὴ ἀμελήσῃς. παρακαλεῖ δέ σε, πάτερ, ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἵνα πέμψῃς αὐτῷ
ἔστι δὲ ἐν … ὑπὸ ἰδιωτῶν … κε ἀρτάβαι χαλκοῦν … γλωσσόκομον … βάδιλλος σιδηροῦς … καρκίνος σιδηροῦς … καὶ προσεγένετο ἐν τῷ … ἔτει … Καίσαρος τοῦ κυρίου
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
φέρω (phero) is a versatile Greek verb meaning to bear, carry, or bring. It can imply physical carrying, enduring, or producing something, and is used in various contexts throughout the New Testament, such as in Luke 23:26 and Hebrews 1:3. The word is built from roots suggesting motion and can also convey metaphorical meanings, like being influenced or prompted. Notably, lexicons differ on the nuances of its use in specific contexts.
On the distinction between these words Lobeck (Phrynichus, p. 585) has the following remarks: ‘ Inter φέρω et φορέω hoc interesse constat, quod iilud actionem simplicem et transitoriam, hoc autem actionis ejusdem continuationem significat ; verbi caus ἀγγελίην φέρειν, est alicujus rei nuncium afferre, Herod. iii. 53 et 122; v.143 ἀγγελίην φορέειν, ili. 34, nuncii munere apud aliquem fungi. Hine et φορεῖν dicimur ea que nobiscum circumferimus, quibus amicti indutique sumus, ut ἱμάτιον, τριβώνιον, δακτύλιον φορεῖν, tum que ad habitum corporis pertinent.’ He proceeds, however, to acknowledge that this distinction is by no means constantly observed even by the best Greek authors. It is, therefore, the more noticeable, as an example of that accuracy which so often takes us by surprise in the use of words by the writers of the N. T., that they are always true to this rule. On the six…
Read the full entry →φέρω
[in LXX chiefly for בּוֹא. hi., also for נשׂא, etc. ;]
to bear;
to bear, carry: c. acc, Lk 23:26 24:1, Jo 19:39, He 1:3 (v. Westc., in l.); pass., Ac 2:2 27:15, 17 He 6:1, II Pe 1:17, 18; of the mind, II Pe 1:21.
φέρω; (allied to Germ. fahren, fahren, [Eng. bear, etc. Scotch bairn, ete. etc.; οἵ. Curtius §411]); impf. ἔφεpov; Pass., pres. φέρομαι ; impf. ἐφερόμην ; fut. act. οἴσω (Jn. xxi. 18; Rev. xxi. 26) 5 1 aor. ἤνεγκα, ptep. ἐνέγκας; 2 aor. inf. ἐνεγκεῖν (Mt. vii. 18T WH); 1 aor. pass. ἠνέχθην (2 Pet. i. 17, 21); [ef WH. App. p. 164; B. 68 (60); W.90 (85sq.); esp. Veitch p. 668 sq.]; fr. Hom. down; Sept. for 827 and Nw); do bear, ie. 1 10 carry; a. to carry some burden: τὸν σταυρὸν ome σθέν τινος, Lk. xxiii. 26 ; to bear with one’s self (which the Grk. writ. express by the mid.), [A. V. to bring]: τί, Lk. xxiv. 1; Jn. xix. 39. b. to move by bearing; pass. like the Lat. feror i.g. moveor, to be conveyed or borne, with a suggestion of speed or force (often so in prof. auth. fr. Hom. down): of persons borne in a ship over the sea, [A. V. to be driven], Acts xxvii. 15,17; of a gust of wind, to…
Read the full entry →φέρω. (1) “bring,”’ “carry”: P Tebt II. 418% (iii/a.p.) καλῶς ποιήσεις, ἄδελφε, [elav εἰσέρχῃ ἐνεγκὼν μετὰ σεαυτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκά μου, ‘you will do well, brother, to come up and bring my wife with you” (Edd.), 26. 42158 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 106) τὸ κιτώνιον αὐτῆς τὸ λευκὸν τὸ παρὰ col ἔνιγκον épx[d]pevos, τὸ δὲ καλλάϊνον μ[ὴ] ἐνίγκῃς, “her tunic, the white one which you have, bring when you come, but the turquoise one do not bring,” P Grenf IT. 73% (late iii/A.p.) (as now read by Deissmann LAE* Ὁ. 214) ot νεκροτάφοι ἐνηνόχασιν (cf. Pro/eg. p. 154) ἐνθάδε εἰς Toerd τὴν ἸΤολιτικὴν τὴν πεμφθεῖσαν εἰς ἤθασιν ὑπὸ τῆς ἡγεμονίας, ‘‘the grave-diggers have brought here to Toéto Politika, who had been sent into the Oasis by the government,’ P Fay 1343 (early iv/A.D.) φέρων εἰ δόξαν σοι τὴν ὕαλον, “bring, if you please, the crystal” (Edd.), and 26. 1367 (iv/a.D.) ἀπαντήσατε ἀπ᾽ ἑαυτῶν mpd τοῦ…
Read the full entry →φέρω (pherō) — to bear/lead.
φέρω
(Locrian dialect φάρω [ᾰ], [Refs 5th c.BC+], only present and imperfect (late 1 aorist 3rd.pers. plural ἤφεραν [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Epic dialect forms, 2nd pers. plural imperative φέρτε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 2nd pers. singular subjunctive φέρῃσθα [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. singular subjunctive φέρῃσι [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect infinitive φερέμεν [Refs 8th c.BC+]imperfect ἔφερον, Epic dialect φέρον [Refs]; also φέρεσκε, φέρεσκον (3rd.pers. plural), [Refs 8th c.BC+]
II. future οἴσω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Doric dialect οἰσῶ [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; 1st pers. plural οἰσεῦμες [Refs]; 3rd.pers. plural ηοίσοντι [Refs]: the following active forms are not future in sense, imperative οἶσε [Refs 8th c.BC+]; 3rd.pers. plural οἰσόντων [Refs 5th c.BC+]; infinitive οἴσειν [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic…
φέρω
phero
a primary verb -- for which other, and apparently not cognate ones are
used in certain tenses only; namely,
oio oy'-o;
and enegko en-eng'-ko
to "bear" or carry (in a very wide application, literally and
figuratively, as follows):--be, bear, bring (forth), carry, come, +
let her drive, be driven, endure, go on, lay, lead, move, reach,
rushing, uphold.
φέρω
v.
I carry, bear, bring, lead
φέρω pherō 66x
to bear, carry, Mk. 2:3; to bring, Mt. 14:11, 18; to conduct, Mt. 17:17; Jn. 21:18; to bear, endure, Rom. 9:22; Heb. 12:20; 13:13; to uphold, maintain, conserve, Heb. 1:3; to bear, bring forth, produce, Mk. 4:8; Jn. 12:24; 15:2; to bring forward, advance, allege, Jn. 18:29; Acts…
Read the full entry →φέρω from Root ἘΝΕΚ or ἘΝΕΓΚ come ἤνεγκον and ἤνεικα from Root ΟΙ comes οἴσω in pl. always Radic. sense, to bear, Lat. fero:
to bear or carry a load, Hom., attic; of a woman with child, Aesch., Soph.
to bear, bear along, implying motion, πόδες φέρον Il.; horses are said ἅρμα φέρειν id. Il.; of a wind, Hom.; ὁ βορέας εἰς τὴν Ἑλλάδα φέρει is fair for Greece, Xen.
to bear, endure, suffer, Od., etc.; of wine, τὰ τρία φέρων bearing three parts of water, instead of ἴσον ἴσωι, Ar.:—often with Advs., βαρέως, δεινῶς, χαλεπῶς φέρειν τι, like Lat. aegre, graviter ferre, to bear impatiently, take ill or amiss, opp. to κούφως, ῥαιδίως φέρειν, Lat. leviter ferre, to bear patiently, take easily, Hdt., attic:—such phrases are constructed mostly c. acc. rei; sometimes, c. dat. only, βαρέως φέρειν τοῖς παροῦσι…
Verb-PAP-ASF — Verb · present · active · participle · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
V-PAP-ASF Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Present Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
66 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 68 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 142 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ταῖς διανοίαις ἐπὶ τὴν πρώτην τῶν ὅλων γένεσιν, ὅτε πρὸ ἡλίου καὶ σελήνης παντοῖα μὲν φυτά, παντοίους δὲ καρποὺς ἤνεγκεν ἡ γῆ, καὶ θεασάμενοι ταῖς διανοίαις ἐλπιζέτωσαν ὅτι καὶ αὖθις οἴσει κατὰ πρόσταξιν τοῦ πατρός, ὅταν αὐτῷ δοκῇ μὴ προσδεηθέντι…
τινὲς μὲν γὰρ ἐπιδεικνύμενοι λόγων δεινότητα καὶ τὴν ἀπʼ αὐτῆς θηρευόμενοι δόξαν ἐπὶ τοῦτο τῆς παιδείας τὸ μέρος ὁρμῶσιν, ἄλλοι δὲ χάριν ἐκείνοις φέροντες, περὶ ὧν τὴν ἀναγραφὴν εἶναι συμβέβηκε, τὸν εἰς αὐτὴν πόνον καὶ παρὰ δύναμιν ὑπέστησαν·
ἐὰν φέρητε σεμίδαλιν, μάταιον: θυμίαμα βδέλυγμά μοί ἐστιν: τὰς νεομηνίας ὑμῶν καὶ τὰ σάββατα οὐκ ἀνέχομαι.
ποιήσαις ἐνθυμηθεὶς ἵνα μηθεὶς ἡμᾶς τῶν ὑπὸ σὲ γραμματέων ἀδικῆι. τὰ δὲ ἄλλα ὁ φέρων σοι τὴν ἐπιστολὴν ἐρεῖ. ἔρρωσο.
γε ἐμβαδικὸν νήσου πυροῦ ξ καὶ κάτεργον ἁμάξης πυροῦ κε γίνονται πε ὧν φέρει … προέχειν Μυρσίνην κροτῶνος α, τῆι αὐτῆι δέδωκα ὅτε ἔτεκεν κροτῶνος 𐅵 γίνεται α
ιβιος τέκνων … … ος ἐπὶ κλίμακος … … Διδυμ διὰ Πέλοπος … ηνέχθη πρὸς … αὐτ Σεντοτοέους … ἐξ Ἑρμώνθ … ταριχευτ … μονκαμεν διὰ Στάχυος
εἰς is a preposition meaning 'into' or 'to,' used with the accusative case. It indicates direction, entrance, or limit, applicable to place, time, and figurative purposes. The New Testament frequently employs it to express movement toward locations or states, as seen in passages like Matthew 8:23. It can also denote relationships or results, such as 'for' or 'among.'
εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…
Read the full entry →εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…
Read the full entry →εἰς (eis) — toward.
ἐν εἰς
or ἐς, PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY:—both forms are found in [Refs 8th c.BC+], Ionic dialect poets, and early metrical Inscrr.; ἐς is best attested in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and is found in nearly all early Ionic dialect Inscrr. (except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; and usually in Attic dialect Prose (except [Refs 5th c.BC+] is used before vowels for the sake of meter; ἐς was retained in the phrases ἐς κόρακας (whence the Verb σκορακίζω), ἐς μακαρίαν. Aeolic dialect poets have εἰς before vowels, ἐς before consonants, and this is given as the rule in [Refs 8th c.BC+]; compare ἐν, ἰν. The diphthong is genuine in Aeolic dialect εἰς, but spurious in Attic dialect-Ionic dialect) Radical sense into, and then more loosely, to:
Read the full entry →εἰς
eis
a primary preposition; to or into (indicating the point reached or
entered), of place, time, or (figuratively) purpose (result, etc.);
also in adverbial phrases:--(abundant-)ly, against, among, as, at,
(back-)ward, before, by, concerning, + continual, + far more
exceeding, for (intent, purpose), fore,
+ forth, in (among, at, unto, -so much that, -to), to the
intent that, + of one mind, + never, of, (up-)on, + perish, + set at
one again, (so) that, therefore(-unto), throughout, til, to (be, the
end, -ward), (here-)until(-to), ...ward, (where-)fore, with. Often
used in composition with the same general import, but only with verbs
(etc.) expressing motion (literally or figuratively).
εἰς
Prep.
into, in, among, till, for
εἰς
into, to c. acc.
PREP. WITH ACC. ONLY. Radical sense, into, and then to:
OF PLACE, the commonest usage, εἰς ἅλα into or to the sea, Hom., etc.:—properly opposed to ἐκ, ἐς σφυρὸν ἐκ πτέρνης from head to foot, Il.; εἰς ἔτος ἐξ ἔτεος from year to year, Theocr.:—then, with all Verbs implying motion or direction, ἰδεῖν εἰς οὐρανόν Il.; εἰς ὦπα ἰδέσθαι to look in the face, id. Il.:—in Hom. and Hdt. also c. acc. pers., where the attic use ὡς, πρός, παρά.
with Verbs which express rest in a place, when a previous motion into or to it is implied, ἐς μέγαρον κατέθηκε, i. e. he brought it into the house, and put it there, Od.; παρεῖναι ἐς τόπον to go to a place and be there, Hdt.
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
1,797 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 37 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 1,766 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
καὶ τοῖς μετόχοις γῆς σιτοφόρου λεγομένης Νεχθαραῦτι θεοῦ μεγάλου παρὰ τῶν ἱερέων ἐτῶν δέκα εἰς τὰ ἐνλιπόντα αὐτῷ ἑτέρων , τεσσάρων εἰς συμπλήρωσιν ἐτῶν πέντε , ὥστε γεωργῆσαι ἧς
καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν
ος, βορρᾶ γῆ Σχώτου τοῦ Τρύφωνος, ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς γῆς, λιβὸς ἡ φέρουσα εἰς τὸ Κρόνειον ὁδός, ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου Πέρσης τῆς
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-ASF — Article · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
T-ASF Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
πόλις (polis) means 'city' and can refer to an enclosed town or the inhabitants of a city. It appears frequently in the New Testament, often in the context of specific cities like Jerusalem or as a general term for urban areas. The word is derived from various dialects and has a rich history in classical literature, indicating both physical locations and the concept of citizenship.
πόλις, -εως, ἡ,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for עִיר;]
a city: Mt 2:23, Mk 1:45, Lk 4:29, Jo 4:8, al. mult.; opp. to κῶμαι (κ. καὶ ἀγροί), Mt 9:35 10:11, Mk 6:56, Lk 8:1 13:22; c. nom. propr. in appos. (cl.), Ac 11:5 16:14; c. id. in gen. appos. (Bl., § 35, 5), Ac 8:5, II Pe 2:6; gen., of the region, Lk 1:26 4:31, Jo 4:5; of the inhabitants,
πόλις, -ews, 7, (πέλομαι, to dwell [or rather denoting originally ‘fulness,’ ‘ throng’; allied with Lat. pleo, plebs, ete.; ef. Curtius p. 79 and §374; Vanitek p. 499; (otherwise Fick i. 138)]), [fr. Hom. down], Sept. chiefly for ~y, besides for 7 Pp, WH (8 ate), ete., a city; a. univ.: Mt. ii. 23; Mk.i.45; Lk. iv. 29; Jn. xi.54; Acts vy. 16, and very often in the historical bks. of the N. T. ; κατὰ τὴν πόλιν, through the city [A. V. in; see xara, IT. 1 a.], Acts xxiv. 12; κατὰ πόλιν, κατὰ πόλεις, see κατά, IT. 3 a. a. p. 328"; opp. to κῶμαι, Mt. ix. 35; x.11; Lk. viii. 1; xiii. 22; to κῶμαι καὶ aypot, Mk. vi. 56; ἡ ἰδία πόλις, see ἴδιος, 1 Ὁ. p. 297"; πόλις with the gen. of a pers. one’s native city, Lk. ii. 4,11; Jn.i.44 (45); or the city in which one lives, Mt. xxii. 7; Lk. iv. 29; x. 11; Acts xvi. 20; Rev. xvi. 19; Jerusalem is called, on account of the temple erected there, πόλις…
Read the full entry →πόλις. In the second Logia fragment, P Oxy IV. 6542, Blass suggested the restoration ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ mrd[Ats (sc. τοῦ θεοῦ), and is followed by White (Sayzzgs, p. 9). It may be worth while to note that this ancient by-form of πόλις occurs in three ostraca of the reign of Caligula as a proper name, Ostr 380! διαγεγρά(φηκεν) Πτόλις Ψενεν(ούφιος), 7. 3811, 3821, and similarly in PSI IV. 317! (a.p. 95) ᾿Ασκληπιάδης Πτόλιδι τῶι φιλτάτωι χαίρειν. This recalls πολιτάρχης 5 the fact that πτόλεμος also survived in the royal name ἹΠτολεμαῖος. The distributive force which πόλις has in several Lucan passages (Ac 154 a/.) and in Tit 1° is to be set against the very different meaning of the phrase in sundry documents of the new collection from Alexandria (reign of Augustus). Schubart, who edits the documents in BGU IV., notes (Archiv v. p. 38) that in a good many papers relating to the hire of a nurse…
Read the full entry →πόλις (polis) — city.
πόλις,
Epic dialect also πτόλις (found sometimes in Trag. etc., see at {πτόλις}), ἡ: Epic dialect forms, accusative singular πόληα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; genitive πόλιος or πτόλιος, [Refs 8th c.BC+] P.(scanned ?~X ?~X ?~X ¯ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: Ionic dialect forms, genitive πόλεως [Refs 6th c.BC+]; dative mostly πόλει, but πόλῑ [Refs 5th c.BC+]; accusative πόλῑς [Refs]: Doric dialect genitive singular πόλιος [Refs 2nd c.BC+]; dative singular πόλι [Refs 4th c.BC+]; dative plural πολίεσι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πολίεσσι Foed.Lac. cited in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Cretan dialect πόλιθι [Refs]: Aeolic dialect genitive πόλιος [Refs 7th c.BC+] disyllable (as also in Comedy texts, except [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Attic dialect dual πόλη [Refs 5th c.BC+]:—city, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; π. ἄκρη, ἀκροτάτη, ={ἀκρόπολις}, the citadel, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; which at Athens also was in early times called…
Read the full entry →πόλις
polis
probably from the same as 4171, or perhaps from 4183; a town
(properly, with walls, of greater or less size):--city.
see GREEK for 4183
see GREEK for 4171
πόλις, εως, ἡ
n.f.
a city
πόλις polis 162x
a city, an enclosed and walled town, Mt. 10:5, 11; 11:1; meton. the inhabitants of a city, Mt. 8:34; 10:15; with a gen. of person, or a personal pronoun, the city of any one, the city of one’s birth or residence, Mt. 9:1; Lk. 2:4, 11; ἡ πόλις, the city, κατ’ ἐξοχήν, Jerusalem, Mt. 21:18; 28:11; met. a place of permanent residence, abode, home, Heb. 11:10, 16; 13:14. The frequency count does not include its occurrence in the name Νέαν πόλιν in Acts 16:11
πόλις πόλις, ιος, ἡ, gen. πόλεως dissyll. in attic Poets ionic and doric πόλιος dissyll. in Il. doric πολίεσι:—acc. πόλεις, πόλιας:— a city, Hom., Hes., etc.; πόλις ἄκρη and ἀκροτάτη, ῀ ἀκρόπολις, the citadel, Il.: this at Athens was often called simply πόλις, while the rest of the city was called ἄστυ, Thuc., etc.:—the name of the city was often added in gen., Ἰλίου π., Ἄργους π. the city of . . , Aesch., etc.; also in appos., ἡ Μένδη π. Thuc.
one's city or country, Od., etc.
when πόλις and ἄστυ are joined, the former is the body of citizens, the latter their dwellings, Il.; ὧν πόλις ἀνάριθμος ὄλλυται, where πόλις = a number of citizens, Soph.:—hence,
Read the full entry →Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
sit'-i (`ir, qiryah; polis):
I. THE CANAANITE CITY
1. Origin
2. Extent
3. Villages
4. Sites
5. External Appearance
6. General
II. THE CITY OF THE JEWISH OCCUPATION
1. Tower or Stronghold
2. High Place
3. Broad Place
4. Streets
5. General Characteristics
III. STORE CITIES
IV. LEVITICAL CITIES
LITERATURE
I. The Canaanite City.
1. Origin:
The development of the Canaanite city has been traced by Macalister in his report on the excavation at Gezer (Palestine Exploration Fund Statement, 1904, 108 ff). It originated on the slopes of a bare rocky spur, in which the Neolithic Troglodytes quarried their habitations out of the solid rock, the stones therefrom being used to form a casing to the earthen ramparts, with which the site was afterwards surrounded and which served as a protection against the intrusion of enemies. Later Semitic intruders occupied the site, stone houses were built, and high stone defense…
City
The earliest mention of city-building is that of Enoch, which was built by Cain (Gen. 4:17). After the confusion of tongues, the descendants of Nimrod founded several cities (10:10-12). Next, we have a record of the cities of the Canaanites, Sidon, Gaza, Sodom, etc. (10:12, 19; 11:3, 9; 36:31-39). The earliest description of a city is that of Sodom (19:1-22). Damascus is said to be the oldest existing city in the world. Before the time of Abraham there were cities in Egypt (Num. 13:22). The Israelites in Egypt were employed in building the “treasure cities” of Pithom and Raamses (Ex. 1:11); but it does not seem that they had any cities of their own in Goshen (Gen.…
The towns and cities of Palestine were commonly built on heights, for better security against robbers or invaders. These heights, surrounded by walls, sometimes formed the entire city. In other cases, the citadel alone crowned the hill, around and at the base of which the town was built; and in time of danger the surrounding population all took refuge in the fortified place. Larger towns and cities were often not only defended by strong outer walls, with towers and gates, but by a citadel or castle within these limits-a last resort when the rest of the city was taken, Jud 9:46,51. The "fenced cities" of the Jews, De 3:5, were of various sizes and degrees of strength; some being surrounded by high and thick stone walls, and others by feebler ramparts, often of clay or sun-dried…
165 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 6 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 163 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 585 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
ἀπεριμάχητον δὲ δόγμα καὶ ἀνωφελὲς ἀναρχίαν ὡς ἐν πόλει κατασκευάζον τῷδε τῷ κόσμῳ τὸν ἔφορον ἢ βραβευτὴν ἢ δικαστὴν οὐκ ἔχοντι, ὑφ’ οὗ πάντ’ οἰκονομεῖσθαι καὶ πρυτανεύεσθαι θέμις.
ὅρους τε γῆς πρῶτος ἔθετο καὶ πόλιν ἐδείματο καὶ τείχεσιν ὠχύρωσεν εἰς ταὐτὸν συνελθεῖν τοὺς οἰκείους καταναγκάσας.
πάλιν ὡς ἔμελλεν ἡ πόλις καὶ ὁ ναὸς καὶ ὁ λαὸς Ἰσραὴλ παραδίδοσθαι, ἐφανερώθη.
ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν ὄντων καὶ οὐσῶν μηνὸς Χοιὰκ … ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει ἐπὶ Πανίσκου ἀγορανόμου τῆς ἄνω τοπαρχίας τοῦ Παθυρίτου. ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Σχώτου ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ
Ἑρμίας ὁ παρὰ Πανίσκου κεχρημάτικα. ἔτους ιϛ Τῦβι λ. τέτακται ἐπὶ τὴν ἐν Κροκοδίλων πόλει τράπεζαν ἐφʼ ἧς Παγκράτης δεκάτης ἐνκυκλίου διʼ Ἀπολλωνίου τελώνου Πακοῖβις Πατοῦτος παστοφορίου ἐντὸς τοῦ
τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν τῶι πατρὶ τοῦ Ὥρου γῆν ἀρουρῶν … ἐν τῶι ἄνω πεδίωι Κροκοδίλων πόλεως ἀπὸ σφραγῖδος μιᾶς ἀναγραφομένης εἰς Ψενμ … τῶν πενταρούρων, νότου γῆ Πετεσούχου τοῦ Ἑρμίου
The Greek word ὅστις (i.e., *hostis*) is a relative pronoun meaning 'whoever' or 'whosoever.' It is used in the New Testament primarily in general statements and relative sentences, often indicating an indefinite person or thing. The word is built from the components for 'who' and 'any.' Notably, there is some distinction in usage between ὅστις and its simpler form ὅς, particularly in the writings of Paul compared to Luke.
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι (also written ὅ, τι and ὅτι; v. LS, s.v.; WH, § 411; Tdf., Pr., 111), in NT scarcely ever except in nom. (M, Pr., 91), the only instance of the oblique cases being found in ἕως ὅτου (v.s. ἕως), relative of indef. reference (related to simple ὅς as Lat. quisquis to qui),
whoever, anyone who;
of an indef. person or thing: in general statements, Mt 5:39, 41 13:12, and freq., Lk 14:27, Ga 5:4, al.; in relative sentences, Mt 7:26, Lk 15:7, Phl 3:7, al.; πᾶς ὅ., c. indic., Mt 7:24 10:32; ὅ ἄν (ἐάν), c. subjc.,
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ,τι (separated by a hypodiastole [comma], to distinguish it from ὅτε; but L T Tr write 6 τι, without a hypodiastole [ef. Td. Proleg. p. 111], leaving a little space between 6 and τι; [WH ὅτι]; cf. W. 46 (45 sq.); [Lipsius, Gramm. Untersuch. p. 118 sq.; WH. Intr. § 4117), gen. οὕτινος (but of the oblique cases only the acc. neut. ὅ,τι and the gen. ὅτου, in the phrase ἕως ὅτου, are found in the N. T.), [fr. Hom. down], comp. of és and tis, hence prop. any one who; i.e. 1. whoever, every one who: ὅστις simply, in the sing. chiefly at the beginning of a sentence in general propositions, esp. in Matt. ; w. an indic. pres., Mt. xiii. 12 (twice); Mk. viii. 34 (where L Tr WH εἴ τις); Lk. xiv. 27; neut. Mt. xviii. 28 Rec.; w. a fut., Mt. v. 39 [RG Trmrg.], 41; xxiii. 12, ete.; Jas. ii. 10 RG; plur. οἵτινες, whosoever (all those who): w. indic. pres., Mk. iv. 20; Lk. viii. 15; Gal.…
Read the full entry →ὅστις. The classical distinction between ὅστις and ὅς which in the NT is maintained on the whole in Paul, but not in Luke (nor in the LXX, Thackeray ΟἿ". i. p. 192), has worn very thin in the papyri. Thus with Mt 2753 a/. we may compare i P Oxy I. 1104 (an invitation to dinner—ii/a.D.) αὔριον, ἥτις
ὅστις (hostis, hētis) — who/which.
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅ τι
(sometimes written ὅ, τι to distinct it from ὅτι, that): [Refs 8th c.BC+] has also the masculine collateral form ὅτις [Refs 8th c.BC+] and Ionic dialect and [Refs 4th c.AD+] and the neuter ὅττι [Refs 8th c.BC+]—In some forms only the second part is inflected, i.e. genitive ὅτου [Refs 5th c.BC+], Epic dialect ὅττεο [Refs 8th c.BC+][same place], contraction ὅττευ [Refs 8th c.BC+]; perhaps also in Ionic dialect, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; Epic dialect ὅτεῳ [Refs 8th c.BC+], and as disyllable, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Epic dialect accusative ὅτινα [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Delph. dative ὅτινι [Refs 3rd c.BC+]; neuter ὅτινα [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect ὅτων [Refs 8th c.BC+], Attic dialect ὅτοισι [Refs 8th c.BC+], Aeolic dialect ὄττινας [Refs 7th c.BC+]: of the forms with double inflexion [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ᾧτινι first in [Refs 8th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →ὅστις
hostis
hetis hay'-tis, and the neuter
ho,ti hot'-ee
from 3739 and 5100; which some, i.e. any that; also (definite) which
same:--X and (they), (such) as, (they) that, in that they,
what(-soever), whereas ye, (they) which, who(-soever). Compare 3754.
see GREEK for 3739
see GREEK for 5100
see GREEK for 3754
ὅστις, ἥτις, ὅτι
Rel.pr.
whosoever, whichsoever, whatsoever
ὅστις any one who, anything which, i. e. whosoever, whichsoever, differing from ὅς, as Lat. quisquis, from qui, Hom., etc.; ὅντινα κιχείη whomsoever he caught, Il.; ὅτις κ ἐπίορκον ὀμόσσῃ whoso forswears himself, id. Il., etc.: —ἔστιν ὅστις, Lat. est qui, often with a negat., οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ᾽ there is no one to whom I would give more, Aesch., etc.: —οὐδὲν ὅ τι οὐ everything, Hdt.
hardly different from ὅς, who, βωμόν, ὅστις νῦν ἔξω τῆς πόλεώς ἐστι the altar, which . . , Thuc.
in indirect questions, ξεῖνος ὅδ᾽, οὐκ οἶδ᾽ ὅστις Od.:—in dialogue, when the person questioned repeats the question asked by τίς, as οὗτος τί ποιεῖς; Answ. ὅ τι ποιῶ; [you ask] what I'm doing?…
Read the full entry →Rel-NSF — Relative pronoun · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
R-NSF Part of Speech: Relative pronoun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
145 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 13 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 140 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
εἰ γοῦν οἱ ἀπὸ μονάδος ἄχρι τετράδος ἑξῆς συντεθεῖεν ἀριθμοί, δεκάδα γεννήσουσιν, ἥτις ὅρος τῆς ἀπειρίας τῶν ἀριθμῶν ἐστι, περὶ ὃν ὡς καμπτῆρα εἱλοῦνται καὶ ἀνακάμπτουσι.
εἰσὶ δʼ οἵτινες ἐβιάσθησαν ὑπʼ αὐτῆς τῆς τῶν πραγμάτων ἀνάγκης οἷς πραττομένοις παρέτυχον ταῦτα γραφῇ δηλούσῃ περιλαβεῖν·
τὸ οὖν χοιρίον πρὸς τοῦτο εἶπεν: οὐ κολληθήσῃ φησίν, ἀνθρώποις τοιούτοις, οἵτινές εἰσιν ὅμοιοι χοίρων: τουτέστιν ὅταν σπαταλῶσιν, ἐπιλανθάνονται τοῦ κυρίου, ὅταν δὲ ὑστεροῦνται, ἐπιγινώσκουσιν τὸν κύριον, ὡς καὶ ὁ χοῖρος ὅταν τρώγει τὸν κύριον οὐκ…
τοὺς τόκους ἃ ὤφειλεν ἡ Θαῆσις τῇ τῶν δύο Ἡρακλείδου καὶ Ἀπίας ἀδελφῆι Ἡρωδιαίνῃ ἥτις ἀπῄτησεν κατὰ ἀσφάλειαν τετελειωμένην διὰ τοῦ ἐν Θεογονίδι γραφείου τῶι ὀγδόωι ἔτει Τραιανοῦ Καίσαρος
ἐτῶν λ οὐλὴ γόνατι ἀριστερῷ … ονους με … συνῆρσθαι τὴν προς ἀλλήλους συνβίωσιν ἥτις αὐτοῖς συνειστήκει ἀπὸ συνγραφῆς ὁμολογίας τετελειωμένης διὰ τοῦ ἐν Τεπτύνει γραφείου ἐν τοῖς ἔμπροσθεν
Ἁδριανοῦ Ἀντωνίνου Σεβαστοῦ Εὐσεβοῦς τύχην ἐργάσεσθαι ἐν τῷ προκιμένῳ δρυμῷ ἀπὸ τῆς ὑπογεγραμμένης ἡμέρας, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἡ πέμπτη τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος μηνὸς Φαρμοῦθι καὶ παραστήσειν τὸν μὲν Ζεναμοῦνιν τὰ ἑαυτοῦ
The Greek word αὐτόματος (i.e., *automatos*) means acting of one's own accord or spontaneously. It can refer to both people acting independently and inanimate things that occur naturally, such as plants growing by themselves. In the New Testament, it appears in Mark 4:28 and Acts 12:10, describing natural processes and events happening without external influence.
αὐτόματος, -ov, and -7, -ov, (fr. αὐτός and μέμαα to desire eagerly, fr. obsol. theme pdw), moved by one’s own inc pulse, or acting withvut the instigation or intervention of another, (fr. Hom. down) ; often of the earth producing plants of itself, and of the plants themselves and fruits growing without culture; [on its adverbial use cf. W. 8 54, 2]: Mk. iv.28; (Hdt. 2, 94; 8, 138; Plat. polit. p. 212 a.; [Theophr. h. p. 2,1]; Diod. 1, 8, ete. Lev. xxv. 5,11). of gates opening of their own accord: Acts xii. 10, (so in Hom. Il. 5, 749; Xen. Hell. 6, 4,7; Apoll. Rh. 4, 41; Plut. Timol. 12; Nonn. Dion. 44, 21; [Dion Cass. 44, 17]).
αὐτόματος. CPHerm 119 verso +318 (Gallienus). . Ἰαὐτόματοι καὶ [. . . , unfortunately in hiatus. Vettius Valens twice uses the adverb with προβιβάζων (or its passive), “advancing of its own accord.”’ With the use of this word in Mk 488, Abbott (Joh. Voc. p. 54) compares Philo’s description of Isaac the self-taught (αὐτομαθής) i. 571-2 ἔστι δὲ kal τρίτος ὅρος τοῦ αὐτομαθοῦς τὸ ἀναβαῖνον αὐτόματον (that which cometh up of itself). Cf. also Wisd 17°, where with reference to the plague of darkness it is said that no power of the fire or the stars could give the Egyptians light, διεφαίνετο δ᾽ αὐτοῖς μόνον αὐτομάτη πυρὰ φόβου πλήρης, “ but there appeared to them the glimmering of a fire self-kindled, full of fear.” On Jn 1677 αὐτὸς yap ὁ πατὴρ φιλεῖ ὑμᾶς, Field remarks (Woées, p- 104) that αὐτός is here = αὐτόματος z/tro, me non commendanie, and cites Callim. 27. Apol/. 6 αὐτοὶ νῦν κατοχῆες…
Read the full entry →αὐτόματος (automatos) — by itself.
αὐτό-μᾰτος, η, ον,
[Refs 8th c.BC+] and Attic dialect; ος, ον [Refs 8th c.BC+].
1. of persons, acting of one's own will, of oneself, αὐ. δέ οἱ ἦλθε[Refs 8th c.BC+]
2. of inanimate things, self-acting, spontaneous, of the gates of Olympus, αὐτόμαται δὲ πύλαι μύκον οὐρανοῦ[Refs 8th c.BC+]; of the tripods of Hephaistos, which ran of themselves, ὄφρα οἱ αὐτόματοι.. δυσαίατ᾽ ἀγῶνα[Refs 5th c.BC+]marionettes, [Refs 4th c.BC+] assim: generally, spontaneous, βίος[Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. of natural agencies, ὁ ποταμὸς αὐ. ἐπελθών of itself, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of plants, growing of themselves, αὐ. ἐκ τῆς γῆς γίνεται[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of philosophers, αὐ. ἀναφύονται[Refs 5th c.BC+]
αὐτόματος
automatos
from 846 and the same as 3155; self-moved ("automatic"), i.e.
spontaneous:--of own accord, of self.
see GREEK for 846
see GREEK for 3155
αὐτόματος, η, ον
Adj
of its own accord
αὐτόματος automatos 2x
self-excited, acting spontaneously, spontaneous, of his own accord, Mk. 4:8; Acts 12:10*
αὐτόματος of persons, acting of one's own will, of oneself, Il., etc.
of things, self-moving, self-acting, spontaneous, of the gates of Olympus, the tripods of Hephaestus, Il.:—of plants, growing of themselves, Hdt.
without apparent cause, accidental, id. Hdt.; αὐτ. θάνατος a natural death, Dem.
αὐτόματον, ου, τό, mere chance, ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου or ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου, Lat. sponte, by chance, naturally, Hdt., Thuc.
adv. -τως ῀ ἀπὸ ταὐτομάτου, Hdt.
Adj-NSF — Adjective · nominative · singular · femininenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-NSF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
2 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 1 different way. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἀνοίγω (anoigo) means 'to open' and is derived from the components ἀνά and οἴγω. It covers a range of meanings, from physically opening doors or gates (Acts 5:19) to metaphorically opening opportunities or welcoming (Revelation 3:20). The verb appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts of spiritual or divine revelation.
ἀν-οίγω
(ἀνά, οἴγω = οἴγνυμι),
[in LXX chiefly for פָּתַח;]
to open;
ἀν-οίγω ; (dvd, οἴγω i. 6. οἴγνυμι) ; fut. ἀνοίξω; 1 aor. ἤνοιξα and (Jn. ix. 14 and as a var. elsewh. also) ἀνέῳξα (an earlier form) [and ἠνέῳξα WH in Jn. ix. 17, 32 (cf. Gen. viii. 6), so Tr (when corrected), but without iota subser.; see I, +]; 2 pf. avéwya (to be or stand open; cf. Bum. Ausf. Spr. ii. p. 250 sq.; (Rutherford, New Phryn. Ρ. 247; Veitch s. v.]; the Attic writ. give this force mostly to the pf. pass.); Pass., [pres. dvotyoua Mt. vii. 8LTrtxt. Wi mrg.; Lk. xi. 10 Tr mrg. WH mrg.]; pf. ptep. ἀνεῳγμένος and ἠνεῳγμένος, (ἠνοιγμένος Acts ix. 8 Tdf.); 1 aor. ἀνεῴχθην, ἠνεῴχθην. and ἠνοίχθην. inf. aveῳχθῆναι (with double augm. Lk. iii. 21); 2 aor. ἠνοίγην (the usual later form); 1 fut. ἀνοιχθήσομαι (Lk. xi. 9 Tdf., 10 LT); 2 fut. ἀνοιγήσομαι ; (on these forms, in the use of which both codd. and edd. differ much, ef. ( Tdf. Proleg. p. 121 sq.]; WH. App. pp. 161, 170; Bim.…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω. That ancient scribes were almost capable of sympathy with modern school-boys in writing the augmented forms of this intractable verb is shown by frequent misspellings in late papyri: thus PSI II. 1329 (iii/a.p.) ἀνῷχθαι. From Ptolemaic papyri we have the regular forms ἠνώιξαμεν P Petr IT. 37 τὸ ?, and ἀνεωιγμένον 20. 2". 5, also ἀνοῖξαι 6. III. Ῥ- 133The phrase of Mt 2" is nearly paralleled in Sy// 60132 (iii/B.C.) ἀνοιγόντων δὲ of ἐξετασταὶ κατ᾽ ἐνιαυτὴν (/. -τὸν) τὸν θησαυρόν : so 7. 6532" (the Andania ‘‘ Mysteries” inscr., in dialect—B.C. 91), 587°? (B.c. 329-8) τῶι τοὺς θησαυροὺς ἀνοίξαντι. That of Rev 59 etc. occurs in Sy? 7904? (i/a.D.) τὰς σφραγῖδας ἀνοιξάτω. Close to this is its use for the “opening ” of a will, as P Ryl II. 1099 (A.p. 235—a stilted document with δυεῖν and υἱέας }) ἐκ διαθήκης τῆς καὶ ἀνοιχθε[(σ]ης κατὰ τὸ ἔθος. We may quote OG/S 22238 (B.c. 266-1)…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω (anoigō) — to open.
Included with: ἀνοίγ-νῡμι
[Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀνοίγω [Refs 5th c.BC+], and Attic dialect as [Refs 4th c.BC+]: imperfect ἀνἔῳγον[Refs 8th c.BC+]; Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἀναοίγεσκον[Refs 8th c.BC+]: future ἀνοίξω[Refs 5th c.BC+]: aorist ἀνέῳξα[Refs 5th c.BC+]participle ἀνεῴξας [Refs]; also ἤνοιξα[Refs 5th c.BC+] and in late Prose; Ionic dialect ἄνοιξα[Refs 5th c.BC+]; poetry ἀνῷξα[Refs 3rd c.BC+] M.: perfect ἀνέῳχα[Refs 4th c.BC+]: pluperfect ἀνεῴγει[Refs 5th c.BC+]:—passive, ἀνοίγνῠμαι [Refs 5th c.BC+]: late future ἀνοιχθήσομαι[LXX+5th c.BC+]: perfect ἀνέῳγμαι[Refs 5th c.BC+]; later ἤνοιγμαι (δι-) best reading in [Refs 5th c.BC+]; pluperfect ἀνέῳκτο[Refs 5th c.BC+](perfect [Refs] is used in passive sense in [Refs 5th c.BC+], and later Prose, as [NT+1st c.AD+] (though he condemns it [Refs]; but in Attic dialect, only [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
Read the full entry →ἀνοίγω
anoigo
from 303 and oigo (to open); to open up (literally or figuratively, in
various applications):--open.
see GREEK for 303
ἀνοίγω
v.
I open
Verb-API-3S — Verb · aorist · passive · indicative · third person · singularaorist passive indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-API-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: Aorist Voice: Passive Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
78 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 78 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 82 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ἰδὼν δὲ κύριος ὅτι μισεῖται Λεία, ἤνοιξε τὴν μήτραν αὐτῆς, Ῥαχὴλ δὲ ἦν στεῖρα" (Gen.
ἔπειτα τῆς λάρνακος περὶ ἄκραν τινὰ ὄρους σταθείσης κατὰ τὴν Ἀρμενίαν συνεὶς ὁ Νῶχος ἀνοίγει τʼ αὐτὴν καὶ θεασάμενος γῆν βραχεῖαν περὶ αὐτὴν ἐπὶ χρηστοτέρας ἤδη γεγονὼς ἐλπίδος ἠρέμει.
λέγει οὖν ὁ προφήτης: Ἐγὼ κύριος, ὁ θεός σου, ἐκάλεσά σε ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ καὶ κρατήσω τῆς χειρός σου καὶ ἐνισχύσω σε, καὶ ἔδωκά σε εἰς διαθήκην γένους, εἰς φῶς ἐθνῶν ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς τυφλῶν καὶ ἐξαγαγεῖν ἐκ δεσμῶν πεπεδημένους καὶ ἐξ οἴκου φυλακῆς…
καὶ τῶν μετόχων τόποι καὶ ἐπί τι μέρος κοινὴ εἴσοδος καὶ ἔξοδος εἰς ἣν ἀνέῳγεν θύρα, βορρᾶ ῥύμη βασιλικὴ, λιβὸς τοῦ προγεγραμμένου Κατοίτου τοῦ Μεγχείους καὶ τῶν μετόχων οἰκία
Γερμανικοῦ χωρὶς πάσης ὑπερθέσεως· ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποδῶ καθὰ γέγραπται ἐξεῖναι σοὶ διὰ σεαυτοῦ ἀνοῖξαι τὸν οἶκον καὶ πωλεῖν τὸ νίτρον κατὰ τὴν πολιτευομένην τούτου τιμὴν καὶ μεταλαβεῖσθαι τὸ
ὧν κεκλήρωνται θύρας καὶ φῶτα θυρίδων τρία , τὸν δὲ Ὧρον Τεσενούφεως ἑαυτῶι ἀνοίγειν … υ κεκλη … … … υ … δ … σειτητην ἀπὸ νότου κατʼ
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-DPM — Personal pronoun · dative · plural · masculinedative — to, for, with — the one it is done to or by.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
P-DPM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Dative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word ἐξέρχομαι, transliterated as exerchomai, is built from the prefix ἐξ meaning 'out of' and the root ἔρχομαι meaning 'to come' or 'to go.' It generally means to go or come out of a place, and can also refer to escaping, departing, or proceeding. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, including the expulsion of demons and the release of prisoners.
ἐξ-έρχομαι,
[in LXX chiefly and very freq. for יצא, also for עלה ,בֹּוא, etc. ;]
depon.,
ἐξέρχομαι ; impf. eEnpyounv; fut. ἐξελεύσομαι; 2 aor. ἐξῆλθον, plur. 2 pers. ἐξήλθετε, 3 pers. ἐξῆλθον, and in LT Tr WH the Atex. forms (see ἀπέρχομαι, init.) ἐξήλGare (Mt. xi. 7, 8,9; xxvi.55; Mk. xiv. 48, ete.), ἐξῆλθαν (1 Jn. ii. 19; 2Jn. 7 [here Tdf. -Ao0v; 3 Jn. 7, ete.]); pe. ἐξελήλυθα;: plpf. ἐξεληλύθειν (Lk. viii. 38, ete.) ; Sept. for N¥? times without number ; to go or come out of; 1. properly; a. with mention of the place out of which one goes, or of the point from which he departs; a. of those who leave a place of their own accord: with the gen. alone, Mt. x.14 (1, Τ Tr WH insert ἔξω) ; Acts xvi. 39RG. foll. by ἐκ : Mk. v. 2; vii. 31; Jn. iv. 30; viii. 59; Acts vii. 3 sq.; 1 Co. v. 10; Rev. xviii. 4, ete. foll. by ἔξω with gen. — with addition of εἰς and ace. of place, Mt. xxi. 17; Mk. xiv. 68; or παρά with ace. of place, Acts xvi. 13; or πρός twa, ace. of pers., Heb. xiii.…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι. For this verb in its ordinary sense it is sufficient to cite P Oxy II. 282" (a complaint against a wife—a.D. 30-35) kata πέρ[α]ς ἐξῆλθε] kal ἀπηνέκαντο (/. —éyKavto) τὰ ἡμέτερα, ‘finally she left the house and they carried off my belongings,” 26. III. 472! (c. A.D. 130) ἀπὸ τῆς ἐκείνου οἰκίας ἐξεληλύθει, 25. 5287 (ii/a.D.) ἀφ᾽ ὡς ἐκξῆλθες (1. €E—) ἀπ᾽ ἐμοῦ πένθος ἡγούμην, ‘‘ever since you Jeft me I have been in mourning” (Edd.): cf. for the constr. with ἀπό, Lk 55. P Oxy I. 1128 (iii/iv A.D.) δήλωσόν por ἢ πλοίῳ éépx [et] ἢ ὄνῳ shows the verb followed by the instrumental dat.: cf. Jn 21%. For ἐξέρχομαι of the driving forth of demons, as in Mk 178 a/., cf. the magical P Par 5741248 (ili/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 114) ἔξελθε, Satpov,. . . Kal ἀπόστηθι ἀπὸ τοῦ 8(e)i(va), and for the verb followed by ἔπί cf. P Tebt 11. 283° (B.c. 93 or 60) ἐξελήλυθεν ἐπὶ τὴν + + μητέρα pov, “‘made…
Read the full entry →ἐξέρχομαι (exerchomai) — to go out.
ἐξέρχομαι,
future -ελεύσομαι (but in Attic dialect ἔξειμι (A) supplies the future, also imperfect ἐξῄειν): aorist 2 ἐξῆλθον, the only tense used in [Refs 8th c.BC+]:— go or come out of, with genitive loci, τείχεος, πυλάων, πόληος, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; ἐ. δωμάτων, χθονός, etc., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of an actor, come out on the stage, [Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, come forth, ἐ. καὶ ἀμῦναι [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b rarely with accusative, ἐξῆλθον τὴν Περσίδα χώραν [LXX+5th c.BC+]
__c absolutely, march out, go forth, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__d of an accused person, withdraw from the country to avoid trial, opposed to φεύγω, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
ἐξέρχομαι
exerchomai
from 1537 and 2064; to issue (literally or figuratively):--come
(forth, out), depart (out of), escape, get out, go (abroad, away,
forth, out, thence), proceed (forth), spread abroad.
see GREEK for 1537
see GREEK for 2064
ἐξέρχομαι
v.
I go out, come out
ἐξέρχομαι exerchomai 218x
to go or come out of; to come out, Mt. 5:26; 8:34; to proceed, emanate, take rise from, Mt. 2:6; 15:18; 1 Cor. 14:36; to come abroad, 1 Jn. 4:1; to go forth, go away, depart, Mt. 9:31; Lk. 5:8; to escape, Jn. 10:39; to pass away, come to an end, Acts 16:19
ἐξέρχομαι fut. -ελεύσομαι in attic ἔξειμι supplies the fut., as also the imperf. ἐξῄειν aor2 ἐξῆλθον Dep.:— to go or come out of, c. gen. loci, Hom., Hdt., etc.; of an actor, to come out on the stage, Ar.:—also c. acc., ἐξ. τὴν χώρην Hdt.:—absol. to go away, march off, Il.: also, to march out, go forth, ἐπί τινα Hdt.:—c. acc. cogn. to go out on an expedition, Xen.: to go through a work, Soph.
ἐξ. εἰς ἔλεγχον to stand forth and come to the trial, Eur.: to turn out so and so, Soph.
c. acc. rei, to execute, Thuc.
of Time, to come to an end, expire, Hdt., Soph.
of prophecies, dreams, events, to be accomplished, come true, Hdt.; ὀρθὸν ἐξ. to come out right, Soph.; μὴ ἐξέλθῃ σαφής lest he turn out a true prophet, id. Soph.
Verb-2AAP-NPM — Verb · second aorist · active · participle · nominative · plural · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked plural masculine.
V-2AAP-NPM Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Participle Case: Nominative Number: Plural Gender: Masculine
220 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 85 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 217 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 332 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
"ἔξελθε ἐκ τῆς γῆς σου καὶ ἐκ τῆς συγγενείας σου“ (Gen.
ὅπως Ἅβραμος ὁ πρόγονος ἡμῶν ἐξελθὼν ἐκ τῆς Χαλδαίων γῆς κατέσχε τὴν τότε μὲν Χαναναίαν νῦν δὲ Ἰουδαίαν λεγομένην.
νῦν δὲ ὅ λέγει: τὰ φύλλα οὐκ ἀπορυήσεται, τοῦτο λέγει: ὅτι πᾶν ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξελεύσεται ἐξ ὑμῶν διὰ τοῦ στόματος ὑμῶν ἐν πίστει καὶ ἀγάπῃ, ἔσται εἰς ἐπιστροφὴν καὶ ἐλπίδα πολλοῖς.
Σωκράτης Ἀθηνοδώρῳ καὶ Ἀμμωνίῳ ἀμφοτέροις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐξελθόντες εἰς Τιβεριανὴν στομώσαντες τὰ σιδήρια τῶν σκληρουργῶν. ἄχρηστα γὰρ πάντα τὰ σιδήρια ἅπαξ ἵνα
τιμιωτάτοις χαίρειν. καλῶς ποιήσετε ἐπεὶ οἱ σκληρουργοὶ λέγουσίν μοι ὅτι οὐχ εἰσερχόμεθα ἔσω στομῶντες ἐξελθόντες στομώσατε. καὶ γράφετε ἡμᾶς ἀργεῖν. ἐκ δύο τὸ … ἓν δρᾶ, ἵνα στομώσητε ἢ
σφῆνας εὐχαριστοῦμεν αὐτοῖς. βέβληται καὶ ἐπιβεβλήμεθα … τὴν πλάκα. εἰ οὖν θέλεις ἵνα ἀπαρτισθῇ, ἔξελθε στομώσειν αὐτοῖς καὶ ἆρον αὐτῶν τὴν πρόφασιν μετὰ δύο σφυροκόπων Μα … Μωνισπος
προέρχομαι (proerchomai) means to go forward or advance, and can refer to both physical movement and metaphorical progression in time or argument. It is used in various contexts, such as to precede someone (Lk 22:47) or to advance in age (Xenophon). The word is a compound of two roots, indicating movement onward or before.
προέρχομαι. For the literal use of προέρχομαι, ‘go forward,” ‘‘advance,” cf. P Leid 01:18. (B.c. 343) (= UPZ i. p. 371) ἕνα δὲ προελθόντα εἰς τὸ μέσον. The word is common in a more general sense like our ‘‘ come forward,” e.g. P Oxy II. 28614 (A.D. 82) τῆς δὲ Φιλουμένης παρ᾽ ἕκαστα διοχλούσης pe προελθεῖν ἠνάγκασμαι, καὶ ἀξιῶ... ., ‘since Philumene is continually pressing me to repay, I have been forced to come forward and request you . . .” (Edd.), 26. IX. 120318 (late i/A.D.) ὅθεν ἀναγκαίως προερχόμενοι ἀξιοῦμεν TO μὲν ὑπόμβνημα ἔχειν ἐν καταχωρισμῷ, ‘ wherefore we perforce come forward with the request that this memorandum should be duly placed on record’’ (Ed.), 74. I. 6839. (a.p. 131) διαyeyov[é]vat ἄλλα ἔτη πέντε καὶ μὴ τεθαρρηκαίναι (/. τεθαρρηκέναι) τ[ὸν] Θέωνα προελθεῖν, ‘‘another five years elapsed without Theon having dared to bring forward his claim” (Edd.). For the double…
Read the full entry →προέρχομαι (proerchomai) — to go before.
προέρχομαι
(πρόειμι serves as future), aorist προῆλθον: perfect προελήλῠθα [Refs 4th c.BC+]:—go forward, advance, [Refs 5th c.BC+] absolutely, προελθών, = _Attic dialect_ παρελθών, having come forward to speak, [Refs 4th c.BC+]: with accusative cognate, π. ἡμερησίαν ὁδόν [Refs 5th c.BC+]
__b come forth, πλάγια π. τὰ ἔμβρυα [Refs 4th c.BC+]to be born, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; appear, be published, of a book, [Refs 1st c.BC+]
__c go away from, leave, ἀπὸ τῆς ἑαυτοῦ [οἰκίας] [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; οὐδεπώποτε ἐξ Αἰθιοπίας τὸν ἕτερον πόδα προελθών [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
προέρχομαι
proerchomai
from 4253 and 2064 (including its alternate); to go onward, precede
(in place or time):--go before (farther, forward), outgo, pass on.
see GREEK for 4253
see GREEK for 2064
προέρχομαι
v.
I go before, precede
προέρχομαι proerchomai 9x
to go forwards, advance, proceed, Mt. 26:39; Mk. 14:35; Acts 12:10; to precede, go before any one, Lk. 22:47; to precede in time, be a forerunner or precursor, Lk. 1:17; to outgo, outstrip in going, Mk. 6:33; to travel in advance of any one, precede, 20:5, 13; 2 Cor. 9:5*
προέρχομαι aor2 -ῆλθον perf. -ελήλυ^θα contr. προὐλήλυθα like πρόειμι (which serves as the fut.) Dep.
to go forward, go on, advance, Hdt., Thuc., etc.: —absol., προελθὼν ὁ κῆρυξ ἐκήρυττε Aeschin.
of Time, προελθόντος πολλοῦ χρόνου Thuc.; of persons, προεληλυθὼς τῇ ἡλικίᾳ far advanced in age, Xen.
to go on, in a story or argument, Plat.
metaph., τὰ Περσέων πρήγματα ἐς τοῦτο προελθόντα the power of the Persians having advanced to this height, Hdt.; εἰς πᾶν μοχθηρίας πρ. Dem.; εἰς τοῦτο προβέβηκεν ἔχθρας, ὥστε . . id. Dem.
to go before or first, Xen.; πρ. τινος to go before him, id. Xen.; later, πρ. τινα NTest.
with instr. of motion, πρ. πόδα to advance the foot, Luc.
Verb-2AAI-3P — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · pluralsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3P Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Plural
9 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 9 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
προελθὼν γοῦν ἐρεῖ ὅτι „ἐφύτευσεν ὁ θεὸς παράδεισον“ (Gen.
ἐπανελθούσης δὲ πεπηλωμένης ἅμα καὶ θαλλὸν ἐλαίας κομιζούσης, μαθὼν τὴν γῆν ἀπηλλαγμένην τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ μείνας ἄλλας ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας τά τε ζῷα τῆς λάρνακος ἐξαφίησιν αὐτός τε μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς προελθὼν καὶ θύσας τῷ θεῷ συνευωχεῖτο τοῖς οἰκείοις.
διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἐδιώχθησαν, ἐνπνεόμενοι ὑπὸ τῆς χάριτος αὐτοῦ, εἰς τὸ πληροφορηθῆναι τοὺς ἀπειθοῦντας, ὅτι εἶς θεός ἐστιν, ὁ φανερώσας ἑαυτὸν διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ, ὅς ἐστιν αὐτοῦ λόγος ἁπὸ σιγῆς προελθών, ὃς κατὰ πάντα εὐηρέστησεν τῷ…
τῆσδε καὶ μετὰ τῶν ἰδίων με ἐκστήσειν προς … μαν οὐ δυνάμενος καθησυχάσαι ἀναγκαίως προέρχομαι διὰ τοῦδε τοῦ ἀναφορίου καὶ ἀξιῶ καταχωρισθέντος μου τοῦ ὑπομνήματος τούτου τὸ ἀντίγραφον μεταδοθῆναι
καταγείνεται οἶκον Νικάνορός τινος οἰκίας ἐπʼ ἀμφόδου Χηνοβοσκῶν καὶ ἀπενεγκάμενοί τινα τῶν τῆς Ἐπιχαρίου, προελθὼν κατεχώρισα τὸ ἁρμόζον ὑπόμνημα. καὶ τῇ δὲ μιᾷ καὶ εἰκάδι τοῦ Μεχεὶρ τοῦ ἐνεστῶτος
γενηθείσης μέχρι νῦν μήτε τῷ υἱῷ μου περιόντι μήδε ἐμοῖ μετὰ θάνατον αὐτοῦ ἀναγκαίως προῆλθον ἐπὶ τῆς σῆς ἐξουσίας καὶ ἀξιῶ συντάξαι γράψαι τῷ τοῦ Ἑρμοπολίτου στρατηγῷ μεταδοῦναι τῇ
The Greek word ῥύμη (i.e., *rhume*) refers to both the rush or force of a moving body and a narrow street or lane. In classical and later Greek, it describes the movement of soldiers or the layout of urban areas. The New Testament uses it in contexts referring to streets in towns, specifically in Matthew, Luke, and Acts.
ῥύμη, της, ἡ, (fr. PYQ i. q. ἐρύω ‘to draw ’ [but Curtius § 517; Vanicek p. 1210, al., connect it with ῥέω ‘to flow 7); 1. in earlier Grk. the swing, rush, force, trail, of a body in motion. 2. in later Grk. a tract of way in a town shut in by buildings on both sides; a street, lane: Mt. vi. 2; Lk. xiv. 21; Acts ix. 11; xii. 10; ef. Is. xv. 3; Sir. ix. 7; Tob. xiii. 18. Cf. Zob. ad Phryn. p- 404; [Rutherford, New Phryn. p. 488; Wetstein on Mt. u. 8.5 W. 22, 23].
ῥύμη For the perf. pass., as in Mt 985, cf. P Petr II. 19 (2) (iii/B.C.) καλῶς οὖμ ποιήσεις ἐϊπι]στροφήν [pov π]οιησάμένος, ἔρρειμαι γὰρ κακῶς διακείμενος ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνου, and for MGr ῥίφτω, cast away”: the form ῥιπτέω see Radermacher G”. p. 84. ῥίχνω, ῥίχτω (ῥιμμένος, ῥιχμένος), “throw,” ‘ see Thumb Hand. p. 353. Pd8n. For this proper name (Ac 1273) cf. the inscr. on a gravestone at Alexandria of iii/B.c.—/reisighke 392 “Pd8y Mion μάμμη. Blass (ad Ac /.c.) points out that the name is found in myths and comedies: see e.g. Menander Fragm. 245°, 546°, Philemon /7. 84. “Ῥοδίνη is found as a proper name in the Christian inscr. CIG IV. 9484. The adj. ῥόδινος occurs in P Oxy III. 496 (articles in a dowry—a.D. 127) ζώνας δύο, σανδυκίνην, ῥοδίνην, ‘2 girdles, one red, the other rose-coloured,” and P Goodsp Chicago 4% (medical prescription—ii/A.D.) κηρωτὴ ῥοδίνη, ‘ wax-ointment scented with rose.”…
Read the full entry →ῥύμη (rhumē) — lane.
ῥύμ-η [ῡ], ἡ,
force, swing, rush of a body in motion, ῥύμῃ ἐμπίπτειν with a swing, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πτερύγων ῥύμη rush of wings, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τροχοῦ ῥύμαισι τευκτὸν.. κύτος formed by the whirl of the potter's wheel, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ῥ. τοῦ αἵματος the flow of blood in the veins, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ῥ. τῆς ἐκκρούσεως [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τῆς ῥ. τῆς ἁλιάδος ὁ ψόφος, of the noise made by a boat in motion, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἡ ῥ. τῆς ὀργῆς κτλ. the vehemence of passion, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. absolutely, rush, charge, of soldiers, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; of ships, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ὑπὸ τοῦ ῥοίβδου καὶ τῆς ῥ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. ={ῥοπή}, Chrysipp. cited in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
ῥύμη
rhume
prolongation from 4506 in its original sense; an alley or avenue (as
crowded):--lane, street.
see GREEK for 4506
ῥύμη, ης, ἡ
n.f.
a street, lane
ῥύμη ῥύμη, ἡ, *ῥύω ῀ ἐρύω the force, swing, rush of a body in motion, Lat. impetus, ῥύμῃ with a swing, Thuc.; πτερύγων ῥύμη the rush of wings, Ar.; ἡ ῥ. τῶν ἵππων Xen.:—metaph., εὐτυχεῖ ῥύμῃ θεοῦ Eur.; ἡ ῥ. τῆς ὀργῆς the vehemence of passion, Dem.
absol. a rush, charge, of soldiers, Thuc., Xen.
a street, Lat. vicus, Polyb., NTest.
Noun-ASF — Noun · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
N-ASF Part of Speech: Noun Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
stret.
See CITY.
Street
The street called “Straight” at Damascus (Acts 9:11) is “a long broad street, running from east to west, about a mile in length, and forming the principal thoroughfare in the city.” In Oriental towns streets are usually narrow and irregular and filthy (Ps. 18:42; Isa. 10:6). “It is remarkable,” says Porter, “that all the important cities of Palestine and Syria Samaria, Caesarea, Gerasa, Bozrah, Damascus, Palmyra, had their ‘straight streets’ running through the centre of the city, and lined with stately rows of columns. The most perfect now remaining are those of Palmyra and Gerasa, where long ranges of the columns still stand.”, Through Samaria, etc.
The streets of a modern Oriental town present a great contrast to those with which we are familiar, being generally narrow, tortuous and gloomy, even in the best towns. Their character is mainly fixed by the climate and the style of architecture, the narrowness being due to the extreme heat, and the gloominess to the circumstance of the windows looking for the most part into the inner court. The street called "Straight," in Damascus, (Acts 9:11) was an exception to the rule of narrowness: it was a noble thoroughfare, one hundred feet wide. divided in the Roman age by colonnades into three avenues, the central one for foot passengers, the side passages for vehicles and horsemen going in different directions. The shops and warehouses were probably collected together into bazaars in ancient as in modern times. (
4 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 4 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
ἐπιστομιεῖ γὰρ ὁ λόγος καὶ ἐγχαλινώσει τὴν ῥύμην καὶ φορὰν τοῦ πάθους.
ὡς δʼ οἱ πρῶτοι διεξῆλθον, ὀπισθοφυλακεῖ μὲν Ἡρώδης, προσπίπτουσι δὲ ἐξαπιναίως οἱ ἐκ τῆς ἐνέδρας ὄντες εἰς πεντακοσίους, καὶ τρεψαμένων τοὺς πρώτους ἐπιδραμὼν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῇ ῥύμῃ τῇ περὶ αὐτὸν παραχρῆμα μὲν ἀνακόπτει τοὺς πολεμίους, ἐπεγείρει δὲ τὸ…
γναφέως οἰκία καὶ ἐπί τι μέρος Μιεῦτος Θ … μ … υτος οἰκία, ἀπηλιώτου ῥύμη βασιλική , καὶ ἀπέχειν τὸν Θέωνα παρὰ τοῦ Ἡρακλείου τὴν ἑσταμένην τιμὴν πᾶσαν ἐκ
πήχεις τριάκοντα τρεῖς πήχει τελείῳ ξυλικῷ τεκτονικῶι καὶ τὰ συνκύροντα πάντα ὧν γείτονες νότου ῥύμη βασιλική, βορρᾶ τοῦ Ἡρακλείδου καὶ τῶν ἀδελφῶν ἑτέρα αὐλή, λιβὸς εἴσοδος καὶ ἔξοδος κοινὴ
μερῶν ἓξ ἐκ … ἐνόντων μέτρων καὶ πηχισμμῶν … θύραν εἰς τὴν ἐκ λιβὸς ῥύμην βασιλικὴν … τὸ ἐπιβάλλον αὐτῇ μέρος ὡς πρόκειται τῶν τῆς … καὶ ξυλικῆς καὶ
εἷς is a cardinal numeral meaning 'one.' It contrasts with many and can function as a noun or adjective. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as emphasizing unity (e.g., John 10:30) or indicating exclusivity (e.g., Matthew 27:14). The entries note its use in phrases like 'one by one' and as an ordinal meaning 'first.'
εἷς, μιά, ἕν, gen. ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός,
cardinal numeral, one;
one, as opp. to many: Mt 25:15, Ro 5:12, I Co 10:8, al.; as subst., Ro 5:15, Eph 2:14; id. c. gen. partit., Mt 5:19, al.; seq. ἐκ (ἐξ), Mk 14:18, Jo 6:8, al.; metaph., of union and concord, Jo 10:30 17:11, Ro 12:4, 5, Phl 1:27; ἀπὸ μιᾶς (B1., § 44, 1), Lk 14:18; c. neg., εἷς. . . οὐ (μή), more emphatic than οὐδείς, no one…
Read the full entry →εἰς, a Prep. governing the Accusative, and denoting entrance into, or direction and limit: into, to, towards, for, among. It is used A. Property I. of Place, after verbs of going, coming, sailing, flying, falling, living, leading, carrying, throwing, sending, etc. ; 1. of a place entered, or of entrance into a place, into; and 8. it stands before nouns designating an open place, a hollow thing, or one in which an object can be hidden: as εἰς (τὴν) πόλιν, Mt. xxvi. 18; xxviii. 11; Mk. i. 45, and often; εἰς r. οἶκον, Mt. ix. 7; συναγωγήν, Acts xvii. 10; πλοῖον, Mt. viii. 23; Jn. vi. 17; Acts xxi. 6; θάλασσαν, Mt. xvii. 27; ἄβυσσον, Lk. viii. 31; οὐρανόν, Lk. ii. 15; κόσμον, In. 1. 9; iii. 19, ete.; τὰ ἴδια, Jn. i. 11; xvi. 32; Acts xxi. 6; ἀποθήκην, Mt. iii. 12; εἰς ra ὦτα, Lk. i. 44; εἰς τὰς ζώνας or ζώνην, Mt. x. 9; Mk. vi. 8, etc.; εἰς ἀέρα, 1 Co. xiv. 9; eis πῦρ, Mk. ix. 22, ete.…
Read the full entry →εἰς ἁλιέων εἰς ᾿Αλεξάνδριί[αν (P Oxy II. 2943 = Selections, Ρ- 34): see further Pro/eg. pp. 234 f., 245. For εἰς in the wide sense in which we use ‘‘for” we may cite such passages as P Lille I. 261 (iii/B.c.) ἔγραψάς μοι περὶ τῆς εἰς THY σησαμείαν γῆς, 20." ἕως ἂν] μάθωμεν περὶ τῶν κ[εχρ]ηματισμένων εἰς τὸν νομόν, P Petr II. 11 (1)" (mid. iii/B.c.) (= Witkowski*, p. 8) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ εἰς τὰ δέοντα ὑπελιπόμην, τὸ δὲ λοιπὸν εἰς τὸ δάνειον κατέβαλον, P Lond 43? (ii/B.c.) (=I. p. 48, Witkowski’, p- 110) ἕξεις ἐφόδιον εἰς τὸ γῆρας, P Tebt I. 577 (8.6. 118) προστε]τάχασι δὲ καὶ τὰ els τὴν ταφὴν τοῦ “Amos, P Oxy I. 379 (A.D. 149) (= Selections, p. 49) ἐγένετο ἐνθάδε ἡ τροφεῖτις εἰς υἱὸν tod ΤΠεσούριος, ‘‘there was concluded here the nursing-contract for the son of Pesouris”; and the recurring formulae in a private account of ς. A.D. 15 τό. 1V. 736° θρύων εἰς τοὺς ἄρτους (ὀβολοὶ δύο)…
Read the full entry →εἷς (ehis) — one.
εἷς, μίᾰ, ἕν
(μίη only in late Ionic dialect Prose): genitive ἑνός, μιᾶς, ἑνός:—Epic dialect ἕεις [Refs 8th c.BC+]:—Doric dialect ἧς [Refs 3rd c.BC+]:—Epic dialect, Aeolic dialect, and Ionic dialect feminine ἴᾰ [Refs 8th c.BC+]: neuter dative (ἰῷ κίον ἤματι) [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Orig. ἕνς, assim. ἔν (δ) probably in [Refs] Indo-European sem-(compare ὁμός); μία from sm-ί; ἴα is not related to μία, but probably to pronominal stem i-(Latin is), compareἰός.)
1. as a Numeral, εἷς κοίρανος ἔστω [Refs 8th c.BC+]; strengthened, εἷς οἶος, μία οἴη, a single
__A one, one alone,[Refs 8th c.BC+]
__b emphatically with a superlative, εἷς οἰωνὸς ἄριστος [Refs 8th c.BC+]; also in Prose, ἐπὶ πλεῖστον δὴ χλιδῆς εἷς ἀνὴρ ἀπίκετο [Refs 5th c.BC+]: without a…
εἷς
heis
(including the neuter (etc.) hen); a primary numeral; one:--a(-n, -ny,
certain), + abundantly, man, one (another), only, other, some. See
also 1527, 3367, 3391, 3762.
see GREEK for 1527
see GREEK for 3367
see GREEK for 3391
see GREEK for 3762
εἷς, μία, ἕν
Adj
one
εἱς heis 345x
numeral one, Mt. 10:29, freq.; only, Mk. 12:6; one virtually by union, Mt. 19:5, 6; Jn. 10:30; one and the same, Lk. 12:52; Rom. 3:30; one in respect of office and standing, 1 Cor. 3:8; equivalent to τις, a certain one, Mt. 8:19; 16:14; a, an, Mt. 21:19; Jas. 4:13; εἱς ἕκαστος, each one, every one, Read the full entry →
Adj-ASF — Adjective · accusative · singular · feminineaccusative — the one it is done to — the object.
Agrees with anything else marked singular feminine.
A-ASF Part of Speech: Adjective Case: Accusative Number: Singular Gender: Feminine
wun.
See NUMBER.
359 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 16 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 336 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 444 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τὸ δὲ παθητὸν ἄψυχον καὶ ἀκίνητον ἐξ ἑαυτοῦ, κινηθὲν δὲ καὶ σχηματισθὲν καὶ ψυχωθὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ νοῦ μετέβαλεν εἰς τὸ τελειότατον ἔργον, τόνδε τὸν κόσμον·
ὅτι λιμοῦ τὴν Χαναναίαν καταλαβόντος εἰς Αἴγυπτον ἀπῆρε καὶ διατρίψας ἐν αὐτῇ τινα χρόνον ὑπέστρεψεν ὀπίσω.
Μεγάλων μὲν ὄντων καὶ πλουσίων τῶν τοῦ θεοῦ δικαιωμάτων εἰς ὑμᾶς, ὑπέρ τι καὶ καθ̓ ὑπερβολὴν ὑπερευφραίνομαι ἐπὶ τοῖς μακαρίοις καὶ ἐνδόξοις ὑμῶν πνεύμασιν: οὕτως ἔμφυτον τῆς δωρεᾶς πνευματικῆς χάριν εἰλήφατε.
ἐωνήσατο παρὰ Πανοβχούνιος τοῦ Τοτόηους ἐν τῷ ιε ἔτει Παῦνι γ ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀρχείου, μιᾶς μὲν ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ λιβὸς πεδίωι, γείτονες· νότου γῆ Πατοῦτος τοῦ Φίβιος, βορρᾶ γῆ
τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν μζ μέσος μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὦτα ἀφεστηκότα χαλκοῦ ταλάντου ἑνός . προπωλητὴς καὶ βεβαιωτὴς τῶν κατὰ τὴν ὠνὴν ταύτην Πετεσοῦχος ὁ ἀποδόμενος ὃν ἐδέξατο
καὶ ἀπηλιώτου τὸ λοιπὸν τῆς Εὐνόου οἰκίας λιβὸς ῥύμη ἐφ ᾧ ἀνοίξει τὴν θύραν εἰς τὴν Ὀρσηοῦς οἰκίαν ἢ οἳ ἂν ὦσι γείτονες πάντοθεν. ἐπρίατο Πετεσοῦχος Νεχθανούπιος ὡς ἐτῶν
καί (kai) is a conjunction meaning 'and,' used to connect words, phrases, and clauses. It serves various functions, including copulative and adjunctive uses, and can express cumulative ideas like 'also' or 'even.' The New Testament frequently employs it to link terms and sentences, as seen in verses like Matthew 2:18 and John 10:3. Abbott-Smith notes its use in both simple and complex structures, while Thayer emphasizes its role as the most common particle in the New Testament.
καί, a conj., and; the most freq. by far of all the particles in the N. T. [On its uses see W. § 53, 3sqq.; B. 361 (310) sqq., and ef. Ellicott on Phil. iv. 12; on the difference between it and τέ see 8. v. τέ ad init. ] I. It serves as a copulative i.e. to connect (Lat. et, atque, Germ. und) ; 1. it connects single words or terms: a. univ., as of Φαρισαῖοι καὶ Σαδδουκαῖοι, Mt. xvi. 1; ὁ θεὸς καὶ πατήρ, he who is God and Father (see θεός, 3); ἐν καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαθῇ, Lk. viii. 15; πολυμερῶς καὶ πολυτρόπως, ΗΘ}. 1. 1; it is repeated before single terms, to each of which its own force and weight is thus given: ἡ υἱοθεσία καὶ ἡ δόξα καὶ ai διαθῆκαι καὶ ἡ νομοθεσία καὶ ἡ λατρεία καὶ αἱ ἐπαγγελίαι, Ro. ix. 4 ; ἁγία καὶ δικαία καὶ ἀγαθή, Ro. vii. 12; add, Mt. xxiii. 23; Lk. xiv. 21; Jn. xvi. 8; Acts xv. 20, 29; xxi. 25; Heb. ix. 10; Rey. v. 12; xviii. 12 sq.; ef. W. 519 sq. (484). b. it…
Read the full entry →και. In LAE p. 129 ff. Deissmann discusses the thoroughly popular character of the Johannine style with its short paratactic sentences, introduced by kal. . . καί. To illustrate this, he cites amongst other exx. a Dream from the Serapeum, P Par 51 (B.C. 160) (= Selections, p. 18 ff. : see especially the amended readings in Archiv vi. p. 204), which runs—** ὦμ[ην] βατί -- δ)ίζειν pe [ἀπ]ὸ λειβὸς ἕως ἀ[ πηλι]ώτου, καὶ ἀναπίπτομαι ἐπ᾿ ἄχυρον" καὶ [ἄν]θρωπ[ος9] ἀπὸ λιβός μου, ἐχόμενός μου’ ἀναπίπτει καὶ αὐτός, καὶ ὥσπερ κεκλειμμ[évot] μου ἦσαν οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, καὶ ἐξαί[φνης] ἀνύγω τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς pov, καὶ ὁρῶ kTA., “ I dreamed that I was going from West to East, and I lie down upon chaff. And there | αὐτὸ (deleted in the original) Σεμφθεῖ. | ἐκ καινῆς ἐν Σομολ(ῶ)…
Read the full entry →καί (kai) — and.
καί,
conjunction, copulative, joining words and sentences,
__A and; also adverb, even, also, just, frequently expressing emphatic assertion or assent, corresponding as positive to the negative οὐ (μή) or οὐδέ (μηδέ). copulative, and,
__A.I joining words or sentences to those preceding, ἦ, καὶ κυανέῃσιν ἐπ᾽ ὀφρύσινεῦσε Κρονίων [Refs 8th c.BC+]: repeated with two or more Nouns, αἱ δὲ ἔλαφοι κ. δορκάδες κ. οἱ ἄγριοι οἶες κ. οἱ ὄνοι οἱ ἄγριοι [Refs 5th c.BC+]; joining only the last pair, [Refs 4th c.BC+]; ὁ ὄχλος πλείων κ. πλείων ἐπέρρει more and more, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; to add epithets after πολύς, πολλὰ κ. ἐσθλά [Refs 8th c.BC+]
καί
kai
apparently, a primary particle, having a copulative and sometimes also
a cumulative force; and, also, even, so then, too, etc.; often used in
connection (or composition) with other particles or small words:--and,
also, both, but, even, for, if, or, so, that, then, therefore, when,
yet.
καί
Cj.
and, even, also, namely
καί kai 9x
(1) and, Mt. 2:2, 3, 11; 4:22; (2) καί ... καί, both ... and; (3) as a cumulative particle, also, too, Mt. 5:39; Jn. 8:19; 1 Cor. 11:6; (4) emphatic, even, also, Mt. 10:30; 1 Cor. 2:10; in NT adversative, but, Mt. 11:19; also introductory of the apodosis of a sentence, Gal. 3:28; Jas. 2:4
Conj — Conjunctionconjunction — it joins clauses, and never changes form.
CONJ CONJunction or conjunctive particle
9,477 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 42 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 8,978 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
3 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν καὶ κανηφόρου τῶν
The Greek word εὐθέως (i.e. *eutheōs*) is an adverb meaning 'immediately' or 'at once.' It is derived from εὐθύς and is used frequently in the New Testament, particularly in the Gospels. Notably, some lexicons indicate that εὐθέως appears in various contexts, while others mention its interchangeability with εὐθύς in certain verses, particularly in Mark.
εὐθέως
adv.
(< εὐθύς),
[in LXX: Jb 5:3 (פִּתְאֹם), Wi 5:12, I Mac 11:12, al. ;]
straightway, at once, directly: Ga 1:16, Ja 1:24, III Jo 14 (cf. Dalman, Words, 28 f.), Re 4:2, and freq. in Mt, Lk, Jo, Ac (in Mk, εὐθύς), q.v.)
εὐθέως, adv., (fr. εὐθύς. straightway, immediately, forthwith: Mt. iv. 20, 22; viii. 3, and often in the histor. bks., esp. Mark’s Gospel [where, however, T Tr WH have substituted εὐθύς in some 35 out of 41 cases]; elsewhere only in Gal. i. 16 ; Jas. i. 24; Rev. iv. 2, (for o8nd, Job ν. 3). shortly, soon: 8 Jn. 14. [From Soph. down. ]
εὐθέως, the more common Hellenistic form for εὐθύς and εὐθύ, is found before both vowels and consonants: cf. Schmid A/éé2cismus ill. p. 126 and Mayser G7. p. 245. The following may serve as exx. of its use—P Par 635+ (B.c. 165) ἠβου[λόμ]ην μὲν εὐθέως καταπλεύσας ὀφθη[ν]αί σοι κατὰ τὸ ἐπιβάλλον, Ῥ Tebt I. 3010 (Β.6. 114) εὐθέως παραλαβὼν Τρύχαμβον, P Ryl II. 229% (A.p. 38) ἐρωτῶ σε ἐκ παντὸς τρόπου εὐθέως μοι πέϊμ͵)ψαι τὰς ἄλλας (ἀρτάβας) Ὑ, 1). 23019 (A.D. 40) μὴ [ο]ὖν ἄλλως ποιή[σ]ῃ(9) μὴ ἵνα δόξωμέν σε εὐθέως ἠλλάχθαι τὰ πρὸς ἡμᾶς, ‘‘do not neglect this, lest we think you to have become all at once estranged towards us” (Edd.), P Fay 119% (c. A.D. 100) εὐθέος πέμσις τὰ κτήνη, ‘‘send the animals at once,’ and BGU II. 4238 (ii/A.D.) (= Selections, p. 91) εὐθέως ὅτε εἰσῆλθον εἰς Μησηγούς, ἔλαβα βιάτικον παρὰ Καίσαρος χρυσοῦς τρεῖς, ““straightway when I entered Misenum, I received my…
Read the full entry →εὐθέως (eutheōs) — immediately.
Included with: εὐθύς, εῖα, ύ,
Ionic dialect and Epic dialect ἰθύς (which see: so always in Hom.and [Refs 5th c.BC+],
__A straight, direct, whether vertically or horizontally, opposed to σκολιός, καμπύλος, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; κατὰ τὸ εὐθὺ ἑστάναι stands still with reference to the vertical, of a spinning top, [Refs]; εὐ. πλόος, ὁδοί, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; εὐθείᾳ (i.e. ὁδῷ) by the straight road, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; τὴν εὐ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]; πλήρης τοῦ εὐθέος tired of going straight forward, [Refs]; ἡ ἐς τὸ εὐ. τῆς ῥητορικῆς ὁδός the direct road to.., [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; κατ᾽ εὐθύ on level ground, [LXX]; but ἡ κατ᾽ εὐ. τάσις in the direct line, [Refs 1st c.BC+]; on the same side, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]; also, opposed to εἰς τὸ ἐντός, [Refs 3rd…
εὐθέως
eutheos
adverb from 2117; directly, i.e. at once or soon:--anon, as soon as,
forthwith, immediately, shortly, straightway.
see GREEK for 2117
εὐθέως
Adv
immediately, soon
εὐθέως eutheōs 36x
immediately, instantly, at once, Mt. 8:3; 13:5
εὐθέως adverb of εὐθύς, q. v.
Adv — Adverbadverb — it qualifies the verb, and never changes form.
ADV ADVerb or adverb and particle combined
93 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 3 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 33 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Μωυσῆς δ’ ἑκάτερον ὑπερβάς, τὸ μὲν ὡς ἄσκεπτον καὶ ἀταλαίπωρον καὶ ἀφιλόσοφον, τὸ δ’ ὡς κατεψευσμένον καὶ μεστὸν γοητείας, παγκάλην καὶ σεμνοτάτην ἀρχὴν ἐποιήσατο τῶν νόμων, μήτ’ εὐθὺς ἃ χρὴ πράττειν ἢ τοὐναντίον ὑπειπὼν μήτ’, ἐπειδὴ προτυπῶσαι τὰς…
κατʼ αὐτὴν δὲ ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν εὐθὺς φυτά τε καὶ σπέρματα γῆθεν ἀνέτειλε.
ἐπισταθέντων δὲ τῶν παρὰ τοῦ βασιλέως καὶ λεγόντων: Πρὸς σὲ εἰσῆλθον οἱ κατάσκοποι τῆς γῆς ἡμῶν: ἐξάγαγε αὐτούς, ὁ γὰρ βασιλεὺς οὕτως κελεύει, ἥδε ἀπεκρίθη: Εἰσῆλθον μὲν οἱ ἄνδρες, οὓς ζητεῖτε, πρός με, ἀλλ̓ εὐθέως ἀπῆλθον καὶ πορεύονται τῇ ὁδῷ:…
r Πισάις Ἡρακλήῳ χαίρειν. ὅταν πρὸς ἀνάγκην θέλῃς παρʼ ἐμοῦ χρήσασθαί τι, εὐθύς σε οὐ κρατῶ, καὶ νῦν παρακληθεὶς τοὺς τρεῖς στατῆρας οὓς εἴρηκέ σοι Σέλευκος δοῦναί
ἐπεὶ κολάζομαι αὐτῶν εἰς Ἀφροδίτην πόλιν, καὶ θέρισον τὸν ὄγμον τῆς Ἀπιάδος καὶ λύσεις εὐθέως εἰς Ἀ … … τὰ δράγματα, καὶ τοὺς ἐλαιῶνας τοὺς ἐν τῇ Ἀπιάδι σκάψον.
ὅτι καταλαμβάνω σε, καὶ ποιῶ. ἐάν σοι οὖν δοκεῖ, κύριε, ἐλθεῖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς, καὶ εὐθέως γείνεται τὸ ἔργον· ἐξήτακα γὰρ, καὶ λέγουσιν ὅτι δυνατόν ἐστιν. ἀσπάζομαι τὴν Νόνναν καὶ
ἀφίστημι (aphistēmi) means to remove or withdraw, and can also imply leading someone to revolt. It has both transitive and intransitive uses, including the idea of departing or abstaining from something. In the New Testament, it appears in contexts of apostasy and withdrawal, such as in Acts 5:37 and Hebrews 3:12. The lexicons indicate a range of meanings from physical removal to metaphorical defection.
ἀφ-ίστημι,
[in LXX for סור, מעל, etc. (41 words in all);]
trans. in pres., impf., fut., 1 aor., to put away, lead away; metaph., to move to revolt: Ac 5:37.
Intrans. in pf., plpf., 2 aor., to stand off, depart from, withdraw from: c. gen., Lk 2:37; seq. ἀπό, Lk 4:13 13:27, Ac 5:38 12:10 15:38 19:9 22:29, II Co 12:8; metaph., ἀπὸ ἀδικίας, II Ti 2:19; ἀπὸ θεοῦ, (fall away, apostatize), He 3:12. Mid. (exc. 1 aor., wh. is trans.), to withdraw oneself from, absent oneself from:
ἀφίστημι. The transitive tenses recur in formulz upon contracts of sale, etc. : the vendor is to ‘‘repel” any claimant or trespasser. Thus BGU IV. 112719 (B.c. 18) καὶ πάντα τὸν ἐπελευσόμενον ἢ ἐμποησόμενον αὐτὸν A. ἀφιστάσιν παραχρῆϊμα τοῖς ἰδίοις δαπανή]μασιν. Generally it is ἀποστήσειν, as P. M. Meyer notes on P Giss J. 512°, where is a list of instances. Cf. P Lond 357 (B.c. 146 or 135) (=I., Ρ- 46) ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀποστήσωι, ἀποστήσω ἐπάναγκον, “if I do not repel him, I will do so under compulsion’’ (Ed.). In P Par 59° (8.6. 160) (= Witkowski?, p. 75) τὸν λόγον τῶν χαλκῶν (sc. λαβέ)" ἀπέστηκα (δραχμὰς) ἢ ἀργυρίου (δραχμὰς) Δσξ, Grenfell-Hunt-Smyly and Wilcken suspect a mistake for ἀπέσχηκα : Witkowski objects that ἀπέχω would have been enough, and would render ‘‘solutum accepi.” But ἀπέσχηκα is quitecommon. Witkowski shows that even in Homer ἀφίσταμαι could mean ‘‘solvo pecuniam…
Read the full entry →ἀφίστημι (aphistēmi) — to leave.
ἀφίστημι:
causal in present and imperfect, in future ἀποστήσω, and aorist I ἀπέστησα, as also in aorist I middle (see. below):—put away, remove, keep out of the way, τὸ ἀσθενέστατον τοῦ στρατεύματος[Refs 5th c.BC+]; of diseases, [Refs 5th c.BC+]hinder from.., [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τὰς τῶν πολεμίων ἐπιβουλάς frustrate them, [Refs 5th c.BC+]; ἀ. τὸν ἄρχοντα depose him, [Refs 5th c.BC+] —aorist middle, Ἀργείων δόρυ πυλῶν ἀπεστήσασθε remoued it from your own gates, [Refs 5th c.BC+], having retired.
2. cause to revolt, of allies, [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. in geometrical constructions, cut off, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
ἀφίστημι
aphistemi
from 575 and 2476; to remove, i.e. (actively) instigate to revolt;
usually (reflexively) to desist, desert, etc.:--depart, draw (fall)
away, refrain, withdraw self.
see GREEK for 575
see GREEK for 2476
ἀφίστημι
v.
I lead away, seduce, depart, abstain from
ἀφίστημι aphistēmi 14x
trans. to put away, separate; to draw off or away, withdraw, induce to revolt, Acts 5:37; intrans., and mid., to depart, go away from, Lk. 2:37; met. to desist or refrain from, let alone, Acts 5:38; 22:29; 2 Cor. 12:8; to make defection, fall away, apostatize, Lk. 8:13; 1 Tim. 4:1; Heb. 3:12; to withdraw from, have no intercourse with, 1 Tim. 6:5; to abstain from, 2 Tim. 2:19
ἀφίστημι Causal in pres. and imperf., in fut. ἀποστήσω, aor1 ἀπέστησα, as also in aor1 mid.:— to put away, remove, c. acc., Aesch., etc.; ἀφ. τινὰ λόγου to hinder from speech, Eur.; ἀφ. τὴν ἐπιβουλήν to frustrate it, Thuc.; ἀφ. τὸν ἄρχοντα to depose him, Xen.; so in aor1 mid., δόρυ πυλῶν ἀπεστήσασθε removed war from your own gates, Eur.
to make to revolt, move to revolt, Hdt., Thuc.
to weigh out, Xen.:—aor1 mid., ἀποστήσασθαι χρεῖος to weigh out or pay the debt in full, Il.; ἀποστήσασθαι τὸν χαλκόν to have the money weighed out to one, Dem.
intr., in Pass., as also in aor2 act. ἀπέστην, imperat. ἀπόστηθι, ἀπόστα, perf. ἀφέστηκα in pres. sense, syncop. pl. ἀφέσταμεν, -στατε, -στᾶσι, inf. ἀφεστάναι, part. ἀφεστώς, -ῶσα, -ός or -ώς: fut. mid.…
Verb-2AAI-3S — Verb · second aorist · active · indicative · third person · singularsecond aorist active indicative — a completed action, viewed as a whole.
V-2AAI-3S Part of Speech: Verb Tense: second Aorist Voice: Active Mood: Indicative Person: third Number: Singular
15 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 12 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 14 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Counted over the 81 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
τοῦτο δὲ πρακτέον, ὅταν ὁ νοῦς τοῦ τόνου τῶν νοητῶν ἀποστὰς ὑφιῆται πρὸς τὰ πάθη καὶ διακαθιζάνῃ ἐνδιδοὺς καὶ ἀγόμενος ὑπὸ τῆς σωματικῆς ἀνάγκης.
δώδεκα μὲν οὖν ἔτη δουλεύοντες καὶ τοὺς ἐπιταχθέντας αὐτοῖς φόρους τελοῦντες ὑπέμειναν, τῷ δὲ τρισκαιδεκάτῳ ἀπέστησαν, καὶ διαβαίνει στρατὸς Ἀσσυρίων ἐπʼ αὐτοὺς στρατηγούντων Ἀμαραψίδου Ἀριόχου Χοδολαμόρου Θαδάλου.
ἀλλὰ σώζει σε τὸ μὴ ἀποστῆναί σε ἀπὸ θεοῦ ζῶντος καὶ ἡ ἁπλότης σου καὶ ἡ πολλὴ ἐγκράτεια: ταῦτα σέσωκέν σε, ἐὰν ἐμμείνῃς, καὶ πάντας σώζει τοὺς τὰ τοιαῦτα ἐργαζομένους καὶ πορευομένους ἐν ἀκακίᾳ καὶ ἁπλότητι.
κατʼ ἀγρὸν οὐ γινομένου ἀφημέρου οὐδʼ ἀποκοίτου ἀνεὺ τῆς τοῦ Δημήτριου γνώμης ἐὰν δὲ ἀποστῆ ἔκ τινος δὲ αἰτίας, ἄλλον ἀντὶ αὐτοῦ παραστήσουσιν αὐτοὶ ἐξ ἀλληλενγύης. τὰς τῆς χρήσεως
οὖν καίτοι μόνων ὄντων ἐνθάδε ἐκ τοῦ ὑπὸ σοὶ νομοῦ ὄνων υια οἱ πλεῖστοι ἀπέστησαν ὡς λοιπὰ ἐνθάδε εἰς σήμερον καταλελεῖφθαι ρνϛ μεθʼ ὧν οἱ ἐπʼ αὐτῶν τεταγμένοι εὐσχήμονες
ἔθος ἐν ἄλλοις τόποις μακρόθεν τῆς κώμης ἐργάζεσθαι, ἀξιοῦμεν ἐὰν σοὶ δόξῃ κελεῦσαι αὐτὸν ἀποστῆναι τῆς καθʼ ἡμῶν ἐπηρείας εἰς τὸ δύνασθαι ἡμᾶς ἐν τοῖς συνήθεσι τόποις ἐργαζομένους πλησιάζουσι
The definite article — the commonest word in the Greek New Testament at 19,867 occurrences. Greek uses it more freely than English does and can drop it deliberately, so its presence and its absence both carry weight for a translator; but no single occurrence carries a message of its own. Here it simply gathers “the things” into one definite bundle.
ὁ, ἡ, τό,
the prepositive article (ἄρθρον προτακτικόν), originally a demonstr. pron. (so usually in Hom.), in general corresponding to the Eng. definite article.
As demonstr. pron.
As freq. in Hom., absol., he (she, it), his (etc.): Ac 17:28 (quoted from the poet Aratus).
ὁ 435 ὁ tives of quantity, ὅλος, πᾶς, πολύς, see each in its own place. d. What has been said concerning adjectives holds true also of all other limitations added to substantives, as ἡ κατ᾽ ἐκλογὴν πρόθεσις, Ro. ix. 11; ἡ παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ διαθήκη, Ro. xi. 27; 6 λόγος 6 τοῦ σταυροῦ, 1 Co. i. 18; ἡ εἰς Χριστὸν πίστις, Col. ii. 5; on the other hand, ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεόν, 1 Th. i. 8; τῆς διακονίας τῆς εἰς τοὺς ἁγίους, 2 Co. viii. 4; see many other exx. of each usage in W. 131 (124) sqq.; [B. 91 (80) sqq.]. e. The noun has the article before it when a demonstrative pronoun (υὗτος, ἐκεῖνος) belonging to it either precedes or follows [W. § 18, 4; B. § 127, 29-31]; as, ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος, Jn. ix. 24 [οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρ. 1, Tr mrg. WH); Acts vi. 13; xxii. 26; ὁ λαὸς οὗτος, Mt. xv. 8; 6 vids σου οὗτος, Lk. xv. 30; plur. Lk. xxiv. 17, and numberless other exx.; οὗτος 6 ἄνθρωπος, Lk. xiv. 30; οὗτος ὁ…
Read the full entry →ὃ, ἡ τό. (1) Apart from connexion with μέν or δέ (see below) the demonstrative use of the art. in the NT is confined to a poetical quotation Ac 1778, but it is not uncommon in the papyri, e.g. P Par 45® (B.C. 153) (= Witkowski®, p. 85) τὰ (for ἃ) πράσεις (Δ πράσσεις), P Oxy VIII. 1160! (iii/iv A.D.) Ta (for ἃ) σεσύλληχα (for συνείληχα) δὲ κέρμα {ταν τηρῶ αὐτὰ εἰς τὴν δίκην, “1 am keeping for the trial the money that I have collected” (Ed.). For the distributive Opéev.. - 6 8€, as in 1 Cor7’, cf. P Lond 535 (B.c. 161) (=I. p. 19, U.P.Z. i. p. 239) kal τὰ μὲν ἡμῶν ἐληφότων εἰς τὴν γινομένην ἡμῖν συντάξειν, τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι διὰ τὴν τῶν ὑποτεταγμένων {(.. ... > παρελκομένων. (2) The use of the art. as a relative, of which there is no trace in the NT, may again be illustrated by the following papyrus citations from ¢c. A.D. 346—P Lond 414® (= II. Ῥ. 292) γεινῴσκιν oe θέλω περὶ τοῦ βρεουίου…
Read the full entry →ὁ (ho) — the/this/who.
ὁ,
ἡ, τό, is, when thus written,
__A demonstrative Pronoun.
__B in Attic dialect, definite or prepositive Article.
__C in Epic dialect, the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nominative masculine and feminine singular and plural, ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codices and most printed books, except when used as the relative; but ὁ, ἡ, οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, α; the nominative forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by [Refs 2nd c.AD+] in Aeolic dialect accusative to [Refs 8th c.BC+] genitive and dative dual τοῖιν [Refs 8th c.BC+]— In Doric dialect and all other dialects except Attic dialect and Ionic dialect the feminine forms preserve the old ᾱ instead of changing it to η, hence Doric dialect etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶ; the genitive plural τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶ; the genitive…
ὁ ἡ τό
ho
he hay, and the neuter
to to
in all their inflections; the definite article; the (sometimes to be
supplied, at others omitted, in English idiom):--the, this, that, one,
he, she, it, etc.
ὁ, ἡ, τό
Article
the
ὁ ho 19x
the prepositive article, answering, to a considerable extent, to the English definite article; but, for the principle and facts of its usage, consult a grammar; ὁ μὲν ... ὁ δέ, the one ... the other, Phil. 1:16, 17; Heb. 7:5, 6, 20, 21, 23, 24; pl. some ... others, Mt. 13:23; 22:5, 6; ὁ δέ, but he, Mt. 4:4; 12:48; οἱ δέ, but others, Mt. 28:17; used, in a poetic quotation, for a personal pronoun, Acts 17:28
ὁ the, that
ὁ, ἡ, τό, is
demonstr. Pronoun.
the definite Article.
in epic, the relative Pronoun, when it is written with the accent ὅ, ἥ, τό ῀ ὅς, ἥ, ὅ. Besides the common forms, note epic gen. sg. τοῖο for τοῦ; pl. nom. τοί, ταί; gen. fem. τάων [α^], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι; dual gen, and dat. τοῖιν:— in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν . . , τοὶ δέ . . , for οἱ μέν . . , οἱ δέ . . ; dat. pl. also τοῖσι, ταῖσι: the dual has commonly but one gender, τώ for τά, τοῖν for ταῖν.
DEMONSTR. PRONOUN:
joined with a Subst., not as the Art., but like Lat. ille, ὁ Τυδείδης Tydeus's famous son, Il.; Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων Nestor— that aged man, id. Il.; τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, id. Il.
Art-NSM — Article · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
T-NSM Part of Speech: definite arTicle Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
THE, an adjective or definitive adjective.
1. This adjective is used as a definitive, that is, before nouns which are specific or understood; or it is used to limit their signification to a specific thing or things, or to describe them; as the laws of the twelve tables. the independent tribunals of justice in our country, are the security or private rights, and the best bulwark against arbitrary power. the sun is the source of light and heat.
This he calls the preaching of the cross.
2. the is also used rhetorically before a noun in the singular number, to denote a species by way of distinction; a single thing representing the whole. the fig tree putteth forth her green figs; the almond tree shall flourish; the grasshopper shall be a burden.
3. In poetry, the sometimes loses the final vowel before another vowel.
Th' adorning thee with so much art,
Is but a barb'rous skill.
20,685 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 83 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 19,783 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
40 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
ἡ τοῦ κόσμου σύστασις καὶ διάταξις τῶν στοιχείων.
Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου τοῦ ἀγαπήσαντος ἡμᾶς, ἐν εἰρήνῃ.
r βασιλεύοντος Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν Φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιε, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
βασιλευόντων Πτολεμαίου τοῦ ἐπικαλουμένου Ἀλεξάνδρου καὶ Βερενίκης τῆς ἀδελφῆς θεῶν φιλομητόρων ἔτους ιϛ, ἐφʼ ἱερέων καὶ ἱερειῶν
The Greek word ἄγγελος (transliterated as aggelos) means 'messenger' and is often used to refer to a divine messenger or angel. It is derived from the verb ἀγγέλλω (to announce). In the New Testament, it encompasses both heavenly beings sent by God and human messengers, with interpretations varying regarding its use in specific contexts, such as in Revelation where it may refer to church leaders or guardian angels.
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ,
[in LXX chiefly for מַלְאָךְ;]
a messenger, one sent: Mt 11:10, Ja 22:25.
As in LXX, in the special sense of angel, a spiritual, heavenly being, attendant upon God and employed as his messenger to men, to make known his purposes, as Lk 1:11, or to execute them, as Mt 4:6. The ἄ. in Re 1:20 2:1, al., is variously understood as
a messenger or delegate,
a bishop or ruler,
a guardian angel,
the prevailing spirit of each church, i.e. the Church itself. (Cf. Swete, Ap)., in l.; DB, iv, 991; Thayer, s.v.; Cremer, 18; MM, VGT, s.v.)
ἄγγελος, -ου, ὁ, 1. a messenger, envoy, one who is sent: Mt. xi. 10; Lk. vil. 24, 27; ix. 52; Mk. i. 2; Jas. li. 25. [Fr. Hom. down. ] 2. In the Scriptures, both of the Old Test. and of the New, one of that host of heavenly spirits that, according alike to Jewish and Christian opinion, wait upon the monarch of the universe, and are sent by him to earth, now to execute his purposes (Mt. iv. 6, 11; xxviii. 2; Mk.i. 13; Lk. xvi. 22; xxii. 43 [L br. WH reject the pass.]; Acts vii. 35; xii. 23; Gal. iii. 19, ef. Heb. i. 14), now to make them known to men (LK. i. 11, 26, ii. 9 sqq.; Acts x. 3; xxvii. 23; Mt. i. 20; ii. 13; xxviii. 5; Jn. xx. 12 sq.); hence the frequent expressions ἄγγελος (angel, messenger of God, 3x90) and ἄγγελοι κυρίου or ayy. τοῦ θεοῦ. They are subject not only to God but also to Christ (Heb. i. 4 sqq.; 1 Pet. iii. 22, ef. Eph. i. 21; Gal. iv. 14), who is described as…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος. In Sy// 51271, a dialect inscr. of ii/B.c. from Calymna, ἄγγελοι are envoys whose names are given. The word is used in the sense of ‘‘intermediary” (cf. Gal 319) in Sy// 122” (iv/B.C.) ὀμόσαι δ] ἀγγέλλων. For the presumably Christian ‘‘angel” inscriptions from Thera see Deissmann LAE, Ῥ. 279 with accompanying facsimile, and the paper “It is his Angel” (J. H. M.) in 71.5 1902, p. 519 f. Add (from Cronert) 7G XII. iii. 933. In Archzv iii. p. 445, No. 67, is published a Greek inscription from Assouan of the time of M. Aurelius, which begins—MeyaAy τύχῃ τοῦ [θε]ο[ῦ. . . τ]ῶν ἀνγέλων τῆς [ἱ]ερεί[ας] : cf. alsop. 451 No. 94 (time of Diocletian), Ὑπὲρ εὐχῆς τῶν ἀνγέλων ’Epeonvol ἀνέθηκαν | κτὰ. Οἱ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ, as in 1 Tim 54, occurs in the extremely interesting Jewish inscription Sy// 816'° κύριε Oo | πάντα ἐ[φ)ορῶν kal οἱ ἄνγελοι θεοῦ. Dittenberger assigns it to i/A.D. and yet…
Read the full entry →ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
messenger, envoy, [Refs 8th c.BC+] — proverbial, Ἀράβιος ἄ., of a loquacious person, [Refs 4th c.BC+]
2. generally, one that announces or tells, e.g. of birds of augury, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; ἄ. ἄφθογγος, of a beacon, [Refs 6th c.BC+]; of the nightingale, ὄρνις.. Διὸς ἄ. [Refs 5th c.BC+]
3. angel, [LXX+NT+1st c.AD+]
4. in later philosophical, semi-divine being, ἡλιακοὶ ἄ.[Refs 4th c.AD+] in R.2.243 K.; ἄ. καὶ ἀρχάγγελοι[Refs 5th c.AD+]: also in mystical and magical writings, [Refs 2nd c.AD+]
II. title of Artemis at Syracuse, [Refs 5th c.AD+]
ἄγγελος (angelos) — angel: messenger.
ἄγγελος, ὁ, ἡ,
ἄγγελος
aggelos
from aggello (probably derived from 71; compare 34) (to bring
tidings); a messenger; especially an "angel"; by implication, a
pastor:--angel, messenger.
see GREEK for 71
see GREEK for 34
ἄγγελος, ου, ὁ
n.m.
an angel, messenger
ἀγγέλλω angellō 1x
to tell, to announce, Jn. 20:18*
ἄγγελος a messenger, envoy, Hom., Hdt., attic
generally, one that announces, of birds of augury, Il.; Μουσῶν ἄγγελος, of a poet, Theogn.; Διὸς ἄγγ., of the nightingale, Soph.; c. gen. rei, ἄγγ. κακῶν ἐμῶν id. Soph.
a divine messenger, an angel, NTest.
Noun-NSM — Noun · nominative · singular · masculinenominative — the one doing it — the subject.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
N-NSM Part of Speech: Noun Case: Nominative Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
an'-jel (mal'akh; Septuagint and New Testament, aggelos):
I. DEFINITION AND SCRIPTURE TERMS
II. ANGELS IN OLD TESTAMENT
1. Nature, Appearances and Functions
2. The Angelic Host
3. The Angel of the Theophany
III. ANGELS IN NEW TESTAMENT
1. Appearances
2. The Teaching of Jesus about Angels
3. Other New Testament References
IV. DEVELOPMENT OF THE DOCTRINE
V. THE REALITY OF ANGELS
LITERATURE
I. Definition and Scripture Terms.
The word angel is applied in Scripture to an order of supernatural or heavenly beings whose business it is to act as God's messengers to men, and as agents who carry out His will. Both in Hebrew and Greek the word is applied to human messengers (1Ki 19:2; Lu 7:24); in Hebrew it is used in the singular to denote a Divine messenger, and in the plural for human messengers…
Angel
A word signifying, both in the Hebrew and Greek, a “messenger,” and hence employed to denote any agent God sends forth to execute his purposes. It is used of an ordinary messenger (Job 1:14: 1 Sam. 11:3; Luke 7:24; 9:52), of prophets (Isa. 42:19; Hag. 1:13), of priests (Mal. 2:7), and ministers of the New Testament (Rev. 1:20).
It is also applied to such impersonal agents as the pestilence (2 Sam. 24:16, 17;
The original word, both in Hebrew and Greek, means messenger, and is so translated, Mt 11:10 Lu 7:24. It is often applied to an ordinary messenger, Job 1:14 1Sa 11:3 Lu 9:52; to prophets, Isa 42:19 Hag 1:13; to priests, Ec 5:6 Mal 2:7; and even to inanimate objects, Ps 78:49 104:4 2Co 12:7. Under the…
184 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 7 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 176 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
Counted over the 119 Old Testament verses where this Greek word stands: which Hebrew word keeps standing there too. A correspondence of verses rather than a word-by-word alignment, so read the percentage as strength of evidence, not as a claim about any single verse.
„ὁ θεός, ᾧ εὐηρέστησαν οἱ πατέρες μου Ἀβραὰμ καὶ Ἰσαάκ, ὁ θεὸς ὁ τρέφων με ἐκ νεότητος ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ ῥυόμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν, εὐλογήσαι τὰ παιδία ταῦτα“ (Gen.
πολλοὶ γὰρ ἄγγελοι θεοῦ γυναιξὶ συνιόντες ὑβριστὰς ἐγέννησαν παῖδας καὶ παντὸς ὑπερόπτας καλοῦ διὰ τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ δυνάμει πεποίθησιν·
ἀλλὰ καὶ ἡ περιτομή, ἐφ̓ ᾗ πεποίθασιν, κατήργηται, περιτομὴν γὰρ εἴρηκεν οὐ σαρκὸς γενηθῆναι: ἀλλὰ παρέβησαν, ὅτι ἄγγελος πονηρὸς ἐσόφιζεν αὐτούς.
τὸ ἐφόδιον, ὅπως ἂν ἀνακομισθῶ πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ μὴ δοκῆι με αὐτοῦ καταρρᾳθυμεῖν. καὶ ἄγγελόν μοι ἀπέστειλε καλῶν με. σὺ οὖν μοι τί συντάσσεις; εὐτύχει.
τὸν σταχθέντα ἐνιαύσιον χρόνον· καὶ ἐμοῦ ται τε Κορνηλίου ἀποπληρώσαντος καθʼ ὁμοιότητα καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγγελῶ τὸν ὁμογνήσιον σοῦ ἀδελφὸν Διόσκορον τῷ ἑξῆς ἔτει ἐκτελοῦντα καὶ αὐτὸν τὸν αὐτὸν ἐνιαύσιον
α … ατερα … α … ω … ταύταις ταῖς φωναῖς ἐχρήσατο ὁ ἄγγελος τοῦ θεοῦ μου ὁ ῥυσάμενός με ἐκ πάντων τῶν κακῶν μου. διό, γνήσιε τέκνον
The Greek word ἀπό (transliterated as apo) is a preposition meaning 'from' or 'away from,' typically used with the genitive case. It covers a wide range of meanings, including separation, origin, and partitive sense, as well as indicating distance in time or place. In the New Testament, it appears in various contexts, such as indicating motion from a place or the source of something. The entries do not show significant disagreement.
ἀπό (on the freq. neglect of elision bef. vowels, v. Tdf., Pr., 94, WH, App., 146),
prep. c. gen. (WM, 462 ff.; on its relation to ἐκ, παρά, ὑπό, WM, 456 f.),
[in LXX for מִן, בְּ, לְ;]
from (i.e. from the exterior).
Of separation and cessation;
of motion from a place: Mt 5:29, 30 7:23, Lk 5:2 22:41, al.;
in partitive sense (M, Pr., 72, 102, 245; MM, s.v.; Bl., § 40, 2), Mt 9:16 27:21, Jo 21:10, Ac 5:2, al.; also after verbs of eating, etc.;
of alienation (cl. gen. of separation), after such verbs as λούω (Deiss., BS, 227), λύω, σώζω, παύω, etc.; ἀνάθεμα ἀ., Ro 9:3; ἀποθνήσκειν ἀ.,
ἀπό, [fr. Hom. down], preposition with the Genitive, (Lat. a, ab, abs, Germ. von, ab, weg, [ef. Eng. of, off ]), Jrom, signifying now Separation, now Origin. On its use in the N. T., in which the influence of the Hebr. 1 is traceable, cf. W. 364 sy. (342), 369 (346) sqq.; B. 321 (276) sqq. [On the neglect of elision before words beginning with a vowel see Τὰ Proleg. p. 94; cf. W. § 5,1a.; B. p.10sq.; WH. App. p. 146.] In order to avoid repetition we forbear to cite all the examples, but refer the reader to the several verbs followed by this preposition. ἀπό, then, is used I. of Separation; and 1. of local separation, after verbs of motion fr. a place, (of departing, fleeing, removing, expelling, throwing, etc., see αἴρω, ἀπέρχομαι, ἀποτινάσσω, ἀποχωρέω, ἀφίστημι, φεύγω. etc.) : ἀπεσπάσθη ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν, Lk. xxii.41; βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ. Mt. ν. 29 sq.3 ἐκβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ [LT Tr WH ἐκ] τοῦ…
Read the full entry →ἀπό. In this and the other prepositions cf very wide and general use we have not pretended to any fullness: they would afford abundant material for a fair-sized treatise. We only notice such special uses as we have remarked in our reading, and have therefore passed over most of the common and obvious uses. On ἀπό there are some illustrations in Prodeg. which may be recalled with some additions. There is the partitive use (pp. 102, 245), still current in MGr: so P Petr III. 11%° (B.c. 234) ddeloO[w] ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μοι [σ]ωμάτων [ἐλ]εύθερα A. kal’A., 2d. 11. τα (1)> (= Selections p- 7) (iii/B.c.) ἀπὸ τούτου τὸ μὲν ἥμυσυ . . . τὸ δὲ λοιπόν κτλ. P Tebt II. 209013 (c. a.D. 50) ἀπολυσίμ[ο]υ ἀπὸ av8[pav πεντή]κοντα ‘one of the 50 exempted persons” (Edd.), P Iand 8° (ii/A.p.) διεπεμψάμην cor. . ἀϊπὸ τοῦ οἸΐνου Κ νίδια τρία, etc. To Kuhring’s scanty exx. (p. 37) for ἀπό of agent (cf. Proleg.…
Read the full entry →ἀπό (apo) — away from.
ἀπό,
Aeolic dialect, Thess., [Refs 7th c.BC+], etc.:—preposition usually with Gen. but see below [Refs 5th c.BC+] (Cf. Sanskrit
__A ápa, Latin ab, Umbr. ap-ehtre 'ab extra', Gothic af, O[Refs 5th c.BC+] af, cef, of, etc.) Orig. sense, from. [ᾰπο?~X: where ἀπο ¯ is found in Epic dialect before see or liquids (as ἀπὸ ἕθεν[Refs 8th c.BC+] was sometimes written in later texts,[Refs] — ᾱ for the sake of meter in _Epic dialect_ compounds, such as ἀπονέεσθαι.]
__A.I OF PLACE, the earliest, and in [Refs 8th c.BC+]
__A.I.1 of Motion, from, away from, ἐσσεύοντο νεῶν ἄπο καὶ κλισιάων[Refs 8th c.BC+]; pleonastic, ἀ. Τροίηθεν[LXX+8th c.BC+]; also ἀπ᾽ αἰῶνος νέος ὤλεο, implying departure from life, [Refs]; opposed to ἐξ, of relatively superficial motion, λαμβάνομεν οὔτε ἐκ τῆς γῆς οὐδέν, οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν[Refs 5th c.BC+]; similarly…
ἀπό
apo
a primary particle; "off," i.e. away (from something near), in various
senses (of place, time, or relation; literal or figurative):--(X
here-)after, ago, at, because of, before, by (the space of), for(-th),
from, in, (out) of, off, (up-)on(-ce), since, with. In composition (as
a prefix) it usually denotes separation, departure, cessation,
completion, reversal, etc.
ἀπό
Prep.
from, away from
ἀπό apo 646x
pr. forth, from, away from; hence, it variously signifies departure; distance of time or place; avoidance; riddance; derivation from a quarter, source, or material; origination from agency or instrumentality
ἀπό from, away from. c. gen.
prep. c. gen. = Lat. ab, from.
OF PLACE:
of Motion, from, away from, Hom., etc.; of warriors fighting from chariots, Hom.
of Position, away from, far from, apart from, ἀπὸ ἧς ἀλόχοιο Il.; ἀπ᾽ ὀφθαλμῶν far from sight, id. Il.; ἀπὸ θαλάσσης Thuc., etc.
of the mind, ἀπὸ θυμοῦ away from, i. e. alien from, my heart, Il.; οὐκ ἀπὸ τρόπου not without reason, Plat.; οὐκ ἀπὸ πράγματος Dem.
in partitive sense, αἶσ᾽ ἀπὸ ληΐδος a part from the booty, a share of it, Od.
OF TIME, from, after, ἀπὸ δείπνου after supper, Il.; ἀπὸ δείπνου γενέσθαι to have done supper, Hdt., etc.; ἀφ᾽ οὗ (sc. χρόνου), Lat. ex quo, id. Hdt., etc.
OF ORIGIN, CAUSE, etc.:
Prep — Prepositionpreposition — its sense depends on the case of the word it governs.
PREP PREPosition
677 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 23 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 647 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
Every reference is on the Strong's page.
ὅθεν οὐκ ἀπὸ σκοποῦ καὶ τὴν γένεσιν ἀνέγραψεν αὐτοῦ μάλα σεμνῶς θεολογήσας.
ὅτι τῶν ἐθνῶν ἕκαστον ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκισάντων προσηγορεύθη.
ὅτι ἀληθῶς βλέπω ἐν ὑμῖν ἐκκεχυμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ πλουσίου τῆς πηγῆς κυρίου πνεῦμα ἐφ̓ ὑμᾶς.
Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος Νεχούτου.
Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς παστοφορίου ὠκοδομημένου καὶ δεδοκωμένου καὶ τεθυρωμένου ἐν τῷ
ἔτους κϛ Μεσορὴι κη. ἀπέδοτο Πετεῆσις Πατῆτος Πελαίαι Εὐνόου τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῶι ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ ἀπηλιώτου μέρει Παθύρεως οἰκίαν ᾠκοδομημένην καὶ δεδοκωμένην καὶ τεθυρωμένην ἧς αἱ γειτνίαι δεδήλωνται διὰ
αὐτός is a pronoun meaning 'self' or 'the same,' used to emphasize distinction or opposition. It can function as a reflexive pronoun and appears frequently in the New Testament, often in contexts that highlight contrast or identity, such as in Luke 5:37 and John 2:25. The entries indicate that it can also be used in various grammatical constructions, including with articles to denote sameness.
αὐτός, -ή, -ό,
determinative pron., in late Gk. much more freq. than in cl. (WM, 178 f.; Jannaris, HGG, §1399).
Emphatic (so always in nom. exc. when preceded by the art., v. infr., iii);
self (ipse), expressing opposition, distinction, exclusion, etc., αὐ. ἐκχυθήσεται, Lk 5:37; αὐ. ἐγινώσκεν, Jo 2:25; αὐ. ὑμεῖς, Jo 3:28; καὶ αὐ. ἐγώ, Ro 15:14; αὐ. Ἰησοῦς, Jo 2:24; αὐ. καὶ οἱ μετ’ αὐτοῦ, Mk 2:25; ὑμεῖς αὐ., Mk 6:31; esp. (as freq in cl.) αὐ. ὁ, Mt 3:4, Mk 6:17, Jo 16:27, I Th 3:11, al.; in late Gk., sometimes…
αὐτός, -7, -d, pron. (“derived from the particle αὖ with the added force of a demonstrative pronoun. In itself it signifies nothing more than again, applied to what has either been previously mentioned or, when the whole discourse is looked at, must necessarily be .upplied.” Klotz ad Devar. ii. p. 219; [see Vaniéek p. 268]). It is used by the bibl. writ. both of the O. T. and of the N. T. far more frequently than the other pronouns; and in this very frequent and almost inordinate use of it, they deviate greatly from prof. auth.; cf. B. § 127, 9. [On classic usage ef. Hermann, Opusce. i. 308 sqq., of which dissertation a summary is given in his edition of Viger pp- 732-736.] I. self, as used (in all persons, genders, numbers) to distinguish a person or thing from or contrast it with another, or to give him (it) emphatic prominence. ik When used to express Opposition or Distinction, it is…
Read the full entry →αὐτός. The weakening of the old distinction between αὐτὸς 6 and ὁ αὐτός, especially in Luke, is noted in Proleg. p. 91, and paralleled from Hellenistic. We may add (cf. Linleitung p. 145f.) Sy// 8071 (ii/A.D.) αὐταῖς ταῖς ἡμέραις, where Dittenberger remarks ‘‘expectaveris ταῖς αὐταῖς," OG/S 383! (Antiochus of Commagene, i/8.c.) τὴν αὐτήν τε κρίσιν, for which Ditt. desiderates ταύτην τὴν κρίσιν, P Iib I. 30° (B.c. 265) αὐτὸς Ὧρος “the said H.,’’ P Lille I. 238 (B.C, 221) οὗ μ[ισ]θωτὴς Ἡρώδ[ης] ὁ αὐτός “ce méme L.,”’ P Oxy VI. 892% (A.D. 338) τῆς αὐτῆς πόλεως, 26. VIII. 1105 (A.D. 254) τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἀμφοδογραμματέως “the said a.’’: all these seem to be practically identical, with αὐτός differing little from ἐκεῖνος. The combination αὐτὸ τοῦτο may be illustrated by P Grenf I. 114 (literary, ii/B.c.) “ for this reason ” (Ed.) as in 2 Pet 1°, P Ryl 11. 77°9 (a.p. 192) καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἀσφαλίσομαι…
Read the full entry →αὐτός (autos) — it/s/he.
αὐτός
(Cretan dialect ἀϝτός [Refs] (also αὐτόν[Refs], reflexive pronoun, self:—in oblique cases used for the personal pronoun, him, her, it:—with Article, ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (also ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
I. self, myself, thyself, etc., accusative to the person of the Verb: frequently joined with ἐγώ, σύ, etc. (see. below 10),
I.1. one's true self, the soul, not the body, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; reversely, body, not soul, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; oneself, as opposed to others who are less prominent, as king to subject, [Refs]; man to wife and children, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; warrior to horses, [Refs 8th c.BC+], or to weapons, [Refs]; shepherd to herd, [Refs 8th c.BC+]; seamen to ships, [Refs]: generally, whole to parts,[Refs 5th c.BC+]: absolutely, the Master, as in the [Refs 4th c.BC+]…
αὐτός
autos
from the particle au (perhaps akin to the base of 109 through the idea
of a baffling wind) (backward); the reflexive pronoun self, used
(alone or in the comparative 1438) of the third person , and (with the
proper personal pronoun) of the other persons:--her, it(-self), one,
the other, (mine) own, said, (self-), the) same, ((him-, my-, thy-
)self, (your-)selves, she, that, their(-s), them(-selves), there(-at,
- by, -in, -into, -of, -on, -with), they, (these) things, this (man),
those, together, very, which. Compare 848.
see GREEK for 109
see GREEK for 1438
see GREEK for 848
αὐτός, αὐτή, αὐτό
Pers.pr.
he, she, it, they, them, same
αὐτός autos 5x
self, very; alone, Mk. 6:31; 2 Cor. 12:13; of one’s self, of one’s own motion, Jn. 16:27; used also in the oblique cases independently as a personal pron. of the third person; ὁ αὐτός, the same; unchangeable, Heb. 1:12; κατὰ τὸ αὐτό, at the same time, together, Acts 14:1; ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτό, in one and the same place, Mt. 22:34; at the same time, together, Acts 3:1
αὐτός self, Lat. ipse:— in the oblique cases simply for the personal Pron., him, her, it:— with the Artic. ὁ αὐτός, ἡ αὐτή, τὸ αὐτό (or ταὐτόν), etc., the very one, the same.
self, myself, thyself, etc., acc. to the person of the Verb., Hom., etc.:
oneself, one's true self, the soul, not the body, Od.; or opp. to others, as king to subjects, parent to children, man to wife, etc., Hom.; hence absol. for the master, τίς οὗτος;—Αὐτός, i. e. Socrates, Ar.; similarly in neut. αὐτὸ δείξει the result will shew, Eur.
of oneself, of one's own accord, Lat. sponte, Hom., Soph.
by oneself, alone, αὐτός περ ἐών although alone, Il.; αὐτοί ἐσμεν we are by ourselves, i. e. among friends, Ar.
in Plat., τὸ δίκαιον αὐτό right in itself, the idea of right, etc.; cf. αὐτοάνθρωπος.
Pron-GSM — Personal pronoun · genitive · singular · masculinegenitive — of, from, belonging to.
Agrees with anything else marked singular masculine.
P-GSM Part of Speech: Personal pronoun Case: Genitive Number: Singular Gender: Masculine
5,861 occurrences in the New Testament, rendered 92 different ways. The commonest English word for it is not its meaning — it is one translator's decision, repeated.
Parsing tells you the form; the treebank tells you the job. Counted over all 5,561 occurrences — a word inside a phrase counts towards whatever that phrase is doing.
← what comes before
what comes after →
branches are dictionary forms, so endings do not split one phrase into five; the number on a branch is how many times the New Testament takes that path
19 inflected forms — one of the commonest words in the New Testament. Full distribution →
Τῶν ἄλλων νομοθετῶν οἱ μὲν ἀκαλλώπιστα καὶ γυμνὰ τὰ νομισθέντα παρ’ αὐτοῖς εἶναι δίκαια διετάξαντο, οἱ δὲ πολὺν ὄγκον τοῖς νοήμασι προσπεριβαλόντες ἐξετύφωσαν τὰ πλήθη μυθικοῖς πλάσμασι τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἐπικρύψαντες.
περὶ τοῦ γένους Ἀδάμου καὶ τῶν ἀπ' αὐτοῦ δέκα γενεῶν τῶν μέχρι τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ.
πεπεισμένος οὖν τοῦτο καὶ συνειδὼς ἐμαυτῷ, ὅτι ἐν ὑμῖν λαλήσας πολλὰ ἐπίσταμαι, ὅτι ἐμοὶ συνώδευσεν ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης κύριος, καὶ πάντως ἀναγκάζομαι κἀγὼ εἰς τοῦτο, ἀγαπᾶν ὑμᾶς ὑπὲρ τὴν ψυχήν μου, ὅτι μεγάλη πίστις καὶ ἀγάπη ἐγκατοικεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν ἐπ’…
Πακοίβιος ἱερεὺς Σούχου καὶ Ἀφροδίτης ὡς ἐτῶν μ εὐμεγέθης μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν αὐτῷ μερίδα γῆς σιτοφόρου ἐν τῷ περὶ Παθῦρειν πεδίωι σφραγίδων τεσσάρων , ἣν καὶ αὐτὸς
1 ἔτους ιζ Θῶυθ κη ἀπέδοτο Πετεσοῦχος Φίβιος καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ τὸ ὕπαρχον αὐτοῖς ἥμισυ περιστερῶνος τοῦ ὄντος ἐν τῶι ἀπὸ βορρᾶ μέρει Παθύρεως χαλκοῦ Γ. ἐπρίατο Ὧρος
ὡς ἐτῶν νε μέσος ἢ ἐλάσσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, καὶ Πετεαρσοῆρις Σχώτου τῶν αὐτῶν ἱερέων ὡς ἐτῶν ν μέσος ἢ ἐλασσων μελίχρως μακροπρόσωπος εὐθύριν ὑπόσκνιφος, ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑπάρχοντος